yaskawa LX1 Operators Manual

%

T0E-C843-7

INSTRUCTIONS

206

CNC

YASNAC’mm

OPERATOR'S

SYSTEM

FOR

T1

fe_APÿJCATIONS

-f.,

Btfort

read

thoroughly.

for

future

Inftfol

th«*«

reference.

operation

(n*lrucffon»

retain

ond

This

instructions ation

features

are

of

builder's

manual

and

This

marked

your

is

primarily

for

maintenance.

manual

of

YASNAC

with

YASNAC

manual.

YASNAC

applies

LXl.

a

dagger.

,

LX1

intended

LX1

to

refer

•

!*>

t&Mz

to

programming,

the

basic

The

optional

the

For

to

the

**?-ÿ,*ÿ*

:<.i

operator's

give

oper¬

and

optional

features

specifications

machine

tool

ff

>uuu

*

&

..

»ÿ

.

-

.-I***'

000

l

;

.

8915

4820-

000

IS®

QQOOOOBBB

,

i

YASNAC

*1'

LXl

OPERATOR'S

BOOB

STATION

PO

512-22

PREFACE

This

manual

tors

instructions

operation

This

manual

tures

marked

of

builder's Read

mation

of

your

this

contained

possible

The

operations

attended

be

not

The

functions

determined

control.

NC

machine

the

over

ority

is

primarily

and

maintenance.

applies

YASNAC

with

a

dagger

YASNAC

manual.

manual

contingency

and

a

by

For

tool

this

for

YASNAC

to

LX1.

LX1,

keeping

herein

to

not

described

with

the

performance

combination

operation

builder's

manual

intended

the

The

refer

in

does

be

control.

LX1

basic

optional

For

to

mind

not

met

in

of

your

manual

to

programming,

and

specifications

the

machine

that

cover

operation.

with

this

as

NC

machine

NC

shall

opera¬

give

optional

features

the

every

manual

machine

and

machine,

take

fea¬

tool

infor¬

should

the

pri¬

are

Unless

apply

ples

Feed

•

Reference

(Return

matic

Absolute

•

Work

otherwise

to

the

shown

Function

return)

Coordinate

description

in

this

Zero

reference

to

.

Zero

specified,

manual.

Selection’

Point

Point.

Zero

of

zero

...

Point.

the

following

programming

(mm/rev

G99

by

manual

4

rules

exam¬

and

)

auto¬

1.

INTRODUCTION

2.

PROGRAMMING

2.1

Tape

2.2

Program

2.3

Coordinate

2.4

Rapid

2,5

Spindle-Speed

2.6

Tool

2.7

Miscellaneous

2.8

Preparatory

NC

3.

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

4.

4.1

4,2

4.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

4.7

4.8

4.9

5.

5.2

5.3

6.

TAPE

Tape

Programming

NC

Tape

NC

Tape

STANDARD

CRT

Pushbuttons.

Power

Display

Loading

Memory

Tape

Edit

Part

Operations

Summary

Operations

Data

TAPE

1

Tape

Taper

Portable

MACHINE

Format

Number

Words

Traverse

Function

Functions

PUNCHINC

Code

140

Handling

ON

and

Part

(in)

NC

/OFF

writing

Programs

CHARACTER

Verifying

J6S

Program

and

1

of

Storing

174

Input

/Output

READER

Reader

Reel

Unit

Tape

CONTROL

TABLE

1

and

Sequency

7

Rate

10

(C-Function)

140

DISPLAY

and

Operation

167

NC

Data

and

Interface

182

unit

STATION

(S-Function)

(M-Function)

Lamps

and

Editing

Function

(T-Function)

Functions

138

OPERATOR'S

Keys,

Operation

163

COMPARTMENT

180

Reader

Number

J5

STATION

141

145

NC

Data

Output

175

182

161

146

156

INDEX

SUBJECT

A

Absoluu Absolute

Accclci

Act

deration

Manual

ind

ADDRESS

Absolute

ADDRESS

ALARM

Number

Alarm

Argument

Automatic Automatic

Automatic

Mode

Auto

AUTO

MODE

Automatic

APPENDIX

COMPENSATION

APPENDIX

SIGNALS

APPENDIX

Battery

B

Battery

Rate

Baud

Display

Bit

Display

Bit

Buffering

Buffer

Canned

C

Characters

Circuit

Circular

(G22

G23)

.

Circular

Compensation

Command

Co

riband

Com

.

a*i».

COMMAND

I

Connecting

Considerations

Constant

Control

'Incremental

/Incremental

ation

/Deceleration

Feed

Keys

Zero

SEARCH

CODES

CODE

Designation

Acceleration

Return

Coordinate

Threading

Handle

HANDLE

Operation

Operation,

1

2

3

4

5

6

Replacement

of

Format,

Function

Register

Cycles

and

Breaker

Multiple

Arc

Interpolation Interpolation,

Path

Data

Pulse

PJLSEI

Specifications

Display

Surface

Command

(G50)

Point

REMEDIES

AND

[ALM]

DISPLAY

of

User

to

Reference

Offset+

in

OF

LIST

OF

STRED

LIST

OF

LIST

OF

LIST

Interfaces

Serial

Parameters

Setting

(M93,

(G90,

Function

for

Servo

Mode

ON

M96)‘l‘

fM97t

Display

Accumulation

Remarks

and

Speed

.....

Inputs

Programming

of

Cutting

of

Raoid

,

Programming

DISPLAY

Macros

/Deceleration

MDI

Settingÿ

(G76)

switchÿ

Mode

System

Cycle

OFFSET

Preparations

SETTING

PARAMETER

LEADSCREW

STANDARD

ALARM

CODES

DATA

and

of

M92)7

G94)

G92,

Characters,

Control

Cornering

(G02,

G03)

Radius

/OFF

Programming

on

Register

of

Cable

for

Control

(G90,

Feed*

Traverse

•

(G28)

Point

*

•

+

*

•

for

NO.

ERROR

INPUT/OUTPUT

•

Setting

of

List

(G1I2)

•••

Radius

Tool

Display

Connectors

Macros

User

G97)T

(G96,

C91)

of

•

’

*

CHAPTER

*

‘

*

'

*

•

2

4

2

4

8

4

2

6

2

6 6

7

SECTION

5

:.3

2

8.32

2.

4.

3.

4.

2.

3.1

4

1.4

2

8.21

4.3.3.

8.6.2

4.3.9

3.

4.

9.1

2.

8.24.10

2.8.24.2

2.4.3

2.8.11

6.2.2

2.8.26.8

6.2.7

1.28

6

7.8

7.5

PACE

$

137

2

13

12

142

56

4

151

212

161 161

81 63

12

34

193

78

200

191

203

202

A-l

6

A-

18

A-

A-19

28

A-

A-46

8

*

•

.

of

4 4 4

2

2 2

•

2

8

•

2

for

2

4

4 4

4

2

4

•

2

8.1.5

8.2

4.9.3

3.

7.1

4.

4

3.6.1

2

7.4

2.1.5

2.7.27

2.1.2

8.3.3

2.8.31.2

2.8.4

2.8,9

2.7.6

4.3.2.

4.3.2

4.3.4.

4.9.4

2.8.24.9

4,3.1

2.8.28

2.8.24.6

1

9

208

176

160

157

19

6

108

4

210

133

27

32

20

147

155

177

79

146

114

76

II

INDEX

SUBJECT

C

Control

Panel

COORDINATE

Coordinate

Cornering

COUNTERACTING

SERVO

CRT

CONTROL

Character

CURRENT CURSOR

Keys

CUTTING

D

CYCLE

DATA

START

INPUT

OPERATION

DECIMAL

Decimal

DISPLAY

Display

Point

and

D15PLAY

RUN

DRY

(G04)

Dwell

E

Edit

Keys

EDIT

LOCK

EDIT

MODE.

EMERGENCY

Error

Detect

Exercises

F

Facing

Feed

FEED

Feed

Cycle

Function

HOLD

Per Per

FEEDRATE

Finishing

FUNCTION

AND

FUSE

BLOWING

FUSE

FOR

CONTROL

FUSES

OF

WORDS

Words

(Gil.

G12)

ALARM

UNIT

Display

POSITION

DEPTH

OVERRIDE

PUSHBUTTON

/OUTPUT

WITH

Dat

DISPLAY

Programming

LOCK

/MACHINE

Write

of

WRITING

AND

SWITCH

*

•

Switch

DISPLAY STOP

OFF

User

B

(F-

Positioning

Macro

(G94)

,

of

Designation

PUSHBUTTON

Minute

Revolution

Cycle

(G98

OVERRIDE

(G70)+

Keys

CIRCUIT

(ALARM

INTEGRATED POWER

INPUT

+

STATUS

(G96,

DISPLAY

INTERFACE+

INTERFACE

Keys

FORMAT. FORMAT.

LOCK

and

Local

OPERATION

IN

Pushbutton

E-Function)

and

Mode)

(G99

(G98.

MODE)

CANCEL

BREAKER

NO.

POWER

FOR

G97)

Switch

AND

for

LAMP

USED.

SETTING

PARAMETERS

Switch

Common

•

-

(G06)

G99)

AND

LAMP

•••

•

*

•

Switch

• •

•

332)

331.

SUPPLY

•

G71

DATA

•

Variables

•

UNIT

and

OF

•

OF

•

G72+

•

CHAPTER

8

2

8

4

6

4

2

6

2

4

6

2 4

4

6

4

6

2

2 2

2

6

2

6

2

4

8

6

8

SECTION

8.1.3

2.3.1

2.8.7

8.4

4.1.2

4.3.4

4.1.8

6.1.29

6.1.2

4.9

4.1.5

3,

6.

4.

7.

3.

4.

2.1.3

6.

1.19

2.8.24.8

4.3

6.1.18

2.8.5

4.6

4.1.10

6.1.22

3.

4.

3.

6.1.4

2.

8.

2.

2.8.24.11

2.8.27.3

2.4.2

2.8.29

6.1.3

2.4.2.

6.1.12

2.8.26.5

4.

1.3

8.3

8.4.1

8.3.1

8.3.2

PACE

207

7 7

30

211

142

128 143

191

186

175

143

3

2

135

136

6

189

78

146

189

28

168

144

190

3

151 186

2

26

82

88

10

115

2

1

186

12

11

188

99

142

209

211

210

C

Codes,

G

(GOO, (G01)

(G06)

(GQ1)

(G02,

(G

04)

(G10)*

(Gil,

(G20,

by

G

List

G06)

Positioning

Error

+

Linear

G03)

Dwell

Tool

A

12)

G

G21)ÿ

...

Code

of

Positioning

Detect

Interpolation

Circular

Offset

Cornering

Inch/

Positioning

OFF

Interpolation

Value

Metric

Designation

....

2

2 2 2 2

2

3.8.

1

2.8.2

2.1

2.

8.

2

2.

8.

2.

2.8.3

2.8.4

2.8.5

2.8.6

2.8.7

•

2.88

*

•

22

23

26

27

28

29

30 32

Hi

INDEX

SUBJECT

(G22.

C

Intel

(G27)

(G28)

G

C

(G30)x

(G31)

(G32)

(G34)

(G

(G36

(G40

(G50) (G50S)

(G50T,

(G65

(G68.

(G70

G70toG76

(G70)J'

{Gil)*

(G72)4'

(G

(G74)

(G75)

G23)~

pol.it

Reference

Automatic

29)

Return

r

Continuous

+

Variable

+

35)

to

Programming

*

to

069)"*“

to

*

73)

*

Radius

ion

2Nd

Reference

Skip

Function

Multi-Start

Set

Tool

G39)+

G44)+

Maximum

G51)+Work

G67)+

Program

G76)

+

,

+

Precaution

Finishing

Removal

Stock

Removal

Pattern

drilling

Peck

Grooving

Point

Return

from

Reference

Thread

Lead

Error

5tored Tool

Nose

Spindle-Speed

User

Multiple

Cycle

Repeating

in

Programming

Check

to

Reference

Point

Return

Cutting

Thread

Stroke

of

Cutting

Compensation

Radius

Absolute

Coordinate

Macro

Mirror

Repetitive

in

Programming

Turning

in

Facing

in

Z-Axis

in

X-Axis

for

Zero

Limit

Compensation

Zero

Setting

Multi-Shift

Image

Cycles

Circular

Point

....

Point

CHAPTER

2

2 2 2

2

•

.

•

*

2 2 2

2

•

*

•

2

SECTION

2.8.9

2.8.

10

2.8.11

2.8.12

2.8.13

2.8.14

2.8.15

2.8.16

2.8.17

2.8.18

2.8.19

2.8.20

2.8.21

2.8.22

2.8.23

2.8.24

2.8.25

2.8.26

2.8.26.9

2.8.26.5

2.8.26.2

2.8.26.3

2.8.26.4

2.8.26.6

2.8.26.7

PACE

12

33 34 35

36

37

40

41

42

44

46

56

57

58

61

85

87

105

99

88

94

7

100

102

(G

(G90,

<C90,

<G90)+

(G92)ÿ

(G94)~

(G96. (G98,

(Gl)l.

(GUI)'*'

(G

(G122,

General

G50

Grooving

Handle

H

Handle Handle

up

High-Speed

76)

112)

Point

POINT

to

G92,

Two

Automatic

G91)*

Absolute/

G94)+

Turning Threading

Facing

G97)+

Constant

G99)J'Feed

G112)*

Taper

Circular

123)

G

"*

Program

Return

RETURN

in

X-Axis

Select

Axis

(Manual

Dial

for

Dials

Axes

Buffer

Threading

Canned

Cycle

B

Cycle

Function

Multiple

Arc

Tool

Life

Form

Switch

(G75)T

Switch*

Pulse

Simultaneous

Register

Incremental

Cycles

Surface

Designation

Cornering

Multiple

Control

Generator)

Cycle

Speed

Cornering

Control

Programming

Control

*

+

of

2 2 2

2

2 2

2

1

•

. .

2

2 2

3

6

2

6 6

6

2

2.8.26.8

2.8.32

2.8.27

2.8.27,1

2.8.27.2

2.8.27.3

28

2.8.

2.8.29

2.8.31

2.8.31.1

2.8.31

2.8.30

2.8.26.1

3.2.2

6.2.4

6.1.24

2.8.26.7

6.1.6

6.

1.5

6.1.8

2.1.6

102

137

108

109

112

114

115

125

.2

133 116

87

138

172

196

101

186 186

187

8

IV

INDEX

SUBJECT

Inch/Metric

Input/Output

Input/

Input

Output

Power

Interfaces

Interlock

Internal

INTRODUCTION

J

JOG

FEEDRATE

OVERRIDE JOG

Pushbuttons

Skip

Label

L

M

Input

Least

Output

Least

Input

Least

Output

Least

Linear

Interpolation

MAINTENANCE

MACHINE

Maintenance

MANUAL

MANUAL MANUAL

Manual Manual

Automatic

Manual Manual

Manual

Operation

Pulse

REFERENCE

Return

Maximum

(MOO,

M01,

(M90toM109)

(M91,

M90)

M92)+

(M93,

(M94.

M95)*

M96)x

(M97,

on

Tool

(M98)

Subroutine

Operation

MDI

Measured

MEM

DATA

Memory Message

M-FUNCTION

(Auxiliary

Miscellaneous

MODE

SELECT

Molded-Case

M

3-Digit

Multi-Block

in

MDI

Mode

Multiple Multiple

Designation

Interface

Signals

Supply,

Functions,

and

(INTERLOCK)

Input

Toggle

Switches

Switch

and

Function

Increment

CONTROL

Call,

Before

History

ABSOLUTE

INTERRUPTION

Interrupting

Operation

Multiply

POINT

to

Reference

Programmable

Spindle-Speed

M30)

M02,

Codes

M

*

Program

Buffering

Remote

Tool

Circular

Radius

Conpensation

Program

Interrupting

Workpiece

(MEMORY

(PROGRAM

Mode

Run

Display

ALARM]

(

LOCK

Function

Lock)

Functions

Switch

Circuit

Output"*1

Writing

Cornering

Repetitive

and

(Gill,

Cycles

by

to

be

Cautions

Types

*

and

RAPID

•

and

•

*

•

*

+

(C01)

STATION

Display

Switch

POINT POINT

Select

Dimensions

Setting

M

Codes

for

Interruption

Function

Offset

Path

Mode

Value

Direct

DATA)

+

Switch

(M-Function)

Breaker

Operation

G112)+

(G70

Code

used,

on

(G20,

Setting

C

of

•

FFEEDRATE

Pushbutton

(Maintenance)

RETURN+

RETURN

switch*

RETURN

Point

Internal

Automatic

Keys

(G50)*

for

Modification

ON

Input*

MEM),

(MCB)

G76)4’

to

Switch

Stop

Processing

/OFF

G21)ÿ

Operation

Display

*

•

*

Switch

•

in

•

*

•

*

•

*

•

-

•

*

.

•

SECTION

2.8.8

4.9.2

8.6.3

8.1.1

4.9.

6.1.23

3.

4.

6.1.10

6.1.9

2.1.4

2.3.3

2.

3.

2.

3.

2.8.3

•

8.6.4

*

4.3.9.

•

6.1.21

•

6.2.5

•

6.1.25

7.3

*

•

7.7

•

6.1.7

•

6.1.14

•

6.2.1

•

2.3.4

•

2.8.22

•

2.7.1

2.7.2

•

2.7.3

2.7.4

•

2.7.5

•

2.7.6

•

2.7.7

•

7.9

•

6.2.3

4.1.11

‘

•

4.

•

4.

•

6.1.20

•

2.7

•

6.1.1

•

8.5

•

2.7.9

4.

2.8.31

•

2.8.26

1

6.

3.1

3.

3.9.

3.

3.1

PACE

32

176

212

206

175

191

2

1S8

1

187

6

7

2

8

26

204

183

213

5

163

190

197 191

201

203

186 188

192

8

57

19 19

19

20

21

204

193

144

2 2

150 162

190

19

185

212

22

149

125

87

CHAPTER

2

*

4

8

4

6

4

I

6

2

2 2 2

2

8

6 8

4

6

•

+

6

7 7

6

•

6

2

•

-

•

*

2

2 2

2

•

7

6

4

6

.

2

6 6

2

4

2

Multi-Start

Thread

Cutting

(C32)4,

*

•

• •

Z

2.8.16

40

V

INDEX

SUBJECT

N

\C

NC

\C

NC

O

OPERATION OPERATION

Opcr

Opi.u“i»i

OPTIONAL

ORG

Other

Overload Overview

P

PAGE

Paper

Parameters.

Part

Part Part

Pari

Part

Put

Part

Pattern

Peek

Position

I

•P1

]

I

a|H

1

\\n

TAPL

Tape

Key

ttion

(ORG1N)

Codes

Levs

1

ape

Program

Programs. Programs,

Programs Programs

Program.

Program

o_

Pi

Drilling

checking

1

Indlmg

.

keeping

PUNCHING

Punch

.

-

Dugnotics

PROCEDURE PROCEDURE

Display

Time

Block

SKIP

BLOCK

Keys

(Alarm

User

of

.....

Displaying Displaying

and

Adding Displaying

and

by

Making

to

Blocks.

Tape.

Tape

ran»

Repeating

in

ABSOLUTE]

l

(EXTERNAL!

*

•

of

SKIP

NO.

Macro

NC

MD1,

Paper

into

(G73)"

Z-Axas

-

(/I

-

Switch

,

351

Body

and and

Data

Loading

Addition

TApe,

Deleting

Modifying

Verifying

Memory,

(G74)“

*

• •

•

-

. .

/9)-

352)

...

Writing Writing

Output

and

into

•

Operations

Checking

Memory

to

Outputting

....

•

Loading

CHAPTER

3

3 3 3 3

3

4

8 6

7

4

2

6

4

2

8

2

,

.

4

3

4

Stored

(IN),

*

Loading

*

4

4 4

4

*

4

2 2

4 4 4

SECTION

3

4

3

3.4.2

PACE

140

140 140

141

140

3.3.2

4.1.6

8.6.1

6.2

140

143

212

192

201

7.

4

4.

3.

2.2.3

6

1.17

4.1.9

2.7.8

8.4.2

2.8.24.3

7

4

1

3.3.

1

4

3.7

7.

4.

3

3.

4.7

4

•

6.4

4.6.2

4.4

4.4.3

4.4.2

4.7.1

4.6.5

4.6.3

4

5.1

4.)

4

8.26.4

2

2.8.26.6

4

4.3.4

3.4.2

4.

4.3

4.1

162

7

189

144

22

211

64

143 140 160

160

171

170 169

163 166

165

171

169

167

163

97

100

129

153

3.4.3

Position Position

Positioning

Power

Precautions

Preparatory

Process

Program

PROGRAM

Program

PROGRAM

og

Pi

INCREMENT!

1

Store

ON

/OFF

ON

/OFF

Sheet

lnteri

Mirror Number

NUMBER

Restart*

RESTART

»*

Return

in

(C00,

fGOl)

in

Functions

PROGRAMMING

Prog

r

rmminjj

Pushbuttons,

G70toG76”.

Pushbutton*

G06)

Operation

Pushbuttons

Programming

•

ON

uption

Image

*

AND

...

Switch*

......

keys,

and

•

*

•

G

(G-Function)

/OFF

069)"”

(G68,

5EQUENCY

Precaution

Lamps

70

(M91,

through

M90)

•

.

G76

•

*

*ÿ

NUMBER

...

.

in

•

4

6

2

4

2 2

3

2

2 2 2

6 6

4

2

4

6.1.30

2.8.2

2.8.2.

4.2

4.1.1

2.8.26.9

2.8

3.2.1

2.7.3

2.8.25

2.2.

2.2

6.2.6

6.

4.

2.8.26.9

.

4.

1.26

3.

I

153

192

23

1

23

145

141

105

22

138

19

85

1

6

197

191

4.

5

154

1

105

*

141

vi

INDEX

SUBJECT

R

Rapid

Traverse

Rapid

Traverse

Rapid

Traverse

RAPID

Rapid

TRAVERSE

Traverse

Reference

Registration

Registered

Registered Display

Remote

RESET

Return

\

S

Routine

Sequence

Servo

of

Power

Tool

Key

from

Inspection

Lag

Servomotor

Setting

S S

Data Data

Data

/Parameter

and

4-Digit 4-Digit

Simultaneous

SINGLE

Skip

Spindle

BLOCK

Function

Counter

Rate Rate

Rate

RATE

Rate,

Range

Point

of

Part

Program

ON

Offset

Reference

Check

Lamps

Return

User

Program

(C27)

Macros

Number

.

(OFF

Pushbuttons

Modification

Zero

Schedule

Number

Pulses

Display

and

DC

[SETTING],

and

Parameter

of

Bit

of

Decimal

Spindle

Display

Data

Parameter

Tapes.

PROGRAMMING

Programming

Controllable

Switch

B*

(G31)*

OVERRIDE

of

(C30)*,

Number,

(Program

(C29)

(ERROR

Motor

Displaying

Data,

Format

Display

Paper

to

Verifying

Aÿ

Axes

2Nd

Checking

(M94,

PULSE].

Inputting

Format

Tape,

Switch

NO.

M95)

and

Outputting

T-ibte),

+

NO.

Wriling

•

•••

•

-

•

of

•

CHAPTER

2

6

2

6

2

4

2

4

2

8

2 4

8

4

2

6

2

4

SECTION

2.4

2,4.1

2.4.1.

6.1.11

2.4.1.2

2.8.10

6.1.15

2.8.13

2.8.24.7

4.6.1

4.

3.

9.

4.2.3

2.7.5

4.

1.12

2.8.12

8.

1

2.2.2

4.

3.

8.1.4

4.3.6

4.4.5

4.

3.6.1

6.

3.

4.

4.7.3

4.5.3

2.5.2

2.5.3

2.3.2

6.1.16

14

8.

2

4.

3.

4.

PACE

10

1

10

188

10

33

189

36

78

168

3

162

146

20

144

35

206

7

8

155

207 157 167

157

3

159

172

168

13

14

7

189

7

36

155

Spindle-Speed

SPINDLE

Splicing

STANDARD

CHARACTER

Status

Stock

Stored

Summary

S

2-Digit

Subprogram

Display

Subroutine

Switching

System

T

Tape

TAPE

Tape

SPEED

NC

Input/Output

Removal

Leadscrew

Stroke

of

Storing

Programming

of

Program

Units

NO.

and

Memory

Code

Code,

FEED

Format

Function

OVERRIDE

Tapes

OPERATOR’S

DISPLAY

Facing

in

Turning

m

Error

Limit.

Limit

Limit"1

Status

Run

on

The

Tape

and

Mode,

of

List

AND

SYSTEM

(S-Function)

Signals,

(G72)'1'

Compensation

Preparation

(G86

to

and

Editing

(SUB

(M98)

Control

Feed

Operation

Switchÿ

STATION

Displaying

(G71)"*"

G89)+

PROG.

Station

Switches

NO.

Swtiches

and

for

Operations

NESTING),

in

WITH

2

6

3

2.5

6.1.

3.4

13

1

13

188

140

CRT

•

4

2

7

2

4 4

2

4

2

6

5

7

3

4

2

4.3.8

2.8.26.3

2.8.26.2

7.4

2.8.19

4.

3.4.

4.8

2.5.

1

4.

2.

3.

2.7.7

6

1

5.

1.

1

7.6

3.

1

3.1.

1

4.1

13

2.1

6

2

141

161

94

88

202

44

154

174

13

46

1

21

185

180

203

138

145

1

vii

INDEX

SUBJECT

T

Tape

Tape Tape

Taper

Tape Tape

T

TC

Thread

Threading

Tool Tool

CONTROL).

Tool

Tool Tool Tool

Tool Tool

Tool

Trouble

T

Tumble

Turning

Turning Turning

Turning

Fur

Reader

Reader Reader Reel

Verifying

4-Digit

Error

Function

Life

Nose

Offsets

Offset

Offset Offset

Offset

Life

Position

Set

Wear

3-Digit

mat

Compartment

Unit-*-.

Unit

Unit*,

Multiple

Cornering

Unit*

Programming"!"

(ALARM

Cutting

Cycle

(T“Function)

Control

DISPLAY

Radius

to

Paper

Data,

Data

Memory

Value Value

Control

Offsets

Compensation

Error

Compensation

Causes

Programming

Box

cle

A

C>

Oil

Power

Off

Power

Power,

Oil

On

Power

On

Power

•

»

•

Portable

391,

NO.

(G32)

,

Continuous

(G92)*

Use

Status

OF

Compensation

Tape,

Displaying

Memory,

into

"!"

<G10)+

Tape,

(G122,

....

and

Remedies

(C90)

Preparation

...

•

(Glll)

392)-

(TOOL

Outputting

and

Inputting

Verifying

GJ23)T

(G35)4'

(T90AA)a

. .

.

+

(G40

Writing

.

for

•

*

.

*

•

• •

LIFE

to

-

•

G44)

•

CHAPTER

2

5

5 5

8

5

2

5

4

2

6

2

4

•

2

4

2 2

4

2

•

2

8

2

5

2

4

7

4

7

SECTION

2.1.1

5.1

1.2

5

8.1.2

5.3

2.8.31.1

5.2

4.5

2.6.2

8.4.3

2.8.15

2.8.27.2

2.6

4.3.2.

2.8.20

4.7.2

4.3.5

4.4.4

2.6.3

2.8.6

4.5.2

2.8

30

2.6.4

2.8.18

2.6.6

8.6

2.6.1

5.1.3

2.8.27.1

4.2.2

7.11

7.10

4.2;

7.2

PACE

1

180

206

182 125 181

167

14

212

37

109

14

3

149

46

172

156

167

15

29

168

116

15

42

18

212

14

181

108

145 204 204

145

201

viii

U

V

W

X

Turning

TV

Check

User

Variable

V

iridbles

Work W'ork

Writing

\-Aÿis

X

-

AXIS

On

(Tape

(G65

Macro

Call

Macro

Lead

Coordinate

Blocks

in

Diameter

MIRROR

Power,

Thread

-

Inspection

Vertical

067)"!“

to

Command

Cutting4-

Multi-Shift

System

Displaying

and

/Rrtdius

IMAGE

Parity

(C50T,

5hiftT

Switching

Switch-

before

Check)

Contents

*

G51)4*

by

7.

7

3

2 2

2

•

2

MDI

4

2

6

1

3.2.3

2.8.24

2.8.

2.8.24.4

2.8.23

2.6.5

4.3.3

2.3.6

6.1.27

17

201

140

61

1

61

41

64

58

17

149

10

191

1.

INTRODUCTION

YASNAC

a

is

microprocessors

ing

provide

to

The

•

duces

speed

creased tion

•

Enhanced

of

command,

continuous

cutting

•

To

tion,

error

and

LX1,

combination

modern

our

the

dual

the

cutting.

by

and

buffering

meters

24

,

and

meet

FMS

tool

correction

other

"Ultraspeed

of

two

running

system

highest

processor

data

processing

Block-to-block

the

use

function.

cutting

/min

capability

feed

500-millimeter

thread

life

functions

variable

trends,

control,

,

stored

cutting,

dual

processor

high-performance

in

parallel.

technique,

lathe

performance.

CNC

system

time

of

high-speed

includes

command,

lead

thread

multiple

pitch

thread

program

user

can

be

interrupt

macro,

stroke

installed.

Incorporat¬

is

it

drastically

meet

to

time

stop

buffer

precise

cutting,

thread

cutting

tool

limit

CNC"

16-bit

designed

high¬

de¬

func¬

a

maximum

feed

.

func¬

set

per

tool

re¬

•

E

,

program

Part

maximum

interface

addition,

in

of

is

high-speed

Programming

tool

radius

coordinate

ar

interpolation,

function.

ing

servo

The ized control

motor

standard

the

low-noise,

and

unit

.

The

position

inductosyn-

system.

memory

320

available

RS422

long

is

compensation

system

function

and

pulse

generator

applied

can

be

with

facilitated

combined

uses

newly

Its

FACIT,

interface

transmission.

function,

a

meters.

serial

distance

further

setting,

and

high-performance

a

feedback

(PG)

complete

extended

data

input

RS232C

capable

by

G

50-work

angle-specified

beveling

drastically

transistorized

available

is

system

closed

a

to

/output

improved

/round¬

miniatur¬

PWM

DC

servo

with

and,

loop

and,

of

line¬

the

2.1

TAPE

2.1.1

A

variable

6313

is

Table

following

indicate

EXAMPLE

a

TAPE

used

2.1

T

FORMAT

block

for

shows

the

address

the

programmable

I

T

format

YASNAC

the

tape

characters

Down

decimal

Four

integer Sign

Coordinate

(X,

conforming

LX1.

format.

number

to

third

places

digits

K)

Z,

I,

m

of

address

2.

to

JIS#

Numerals

Table

of

digits.

in

mm

or

in.

PROGRAMMING

B

2.1

Note:

actual

including

Decimal

The

leading

dress

med,

In

is

programming,

code)

(;).

codes.

but

manual,

the

represented

should

programming.

all

The

Point

decimal

Programming.

zeros

Plus

minus

EOB

by

CR

be

used

point

points,

can

be

signs

code

semicolon

a

(EIA

instead

may

For

refer

suppressed

need

must

in

a

code)

be

making

not

be

program

(;)

or

LF/NL

of

the

.

omitted

a

program

2.

1.3

to

for

all

be

program¬

programmed.

example

actual

In

(ISO

semicolon

in

ad¬

#

Japanese

Industrial

Standard

1

2.1.1

TAPE

FORMAT

(CONT'D)

Table

2.1

Tape

Format

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Program

Sequence

G-

Function

coordinate

Z,

X,

a.

/min

Feed

rev

/

Feed

Thread

S-Function

-Function

T

M-Function

Address

No.

Word

I,

and

Lead

K,

U,

W,

Metric

Input

+

a

43

(

a

R

+

53

F50 F32 E34

output

Inch

input

Inch

Metric

Input

04

N

4

G3

+

a

(

a

F50

F42

E44

)$

+

a

34

+

(

44

a

H

F32

F24

E26

S2

S4

T(

T

1)

2

«ÿ

2)

(

2

M3 M3

53 53

T(2

T(

04

)+

2

output

Inch

N

4

G3

(

S2

S4

+

:

B

Basic

:

O

input

Option

B

+

34

a

+

F42

F24

E26

44

In¬

B

B B

B

O

1)

2)

B

O

B

10

11

12

13

14

15

1.

Dwell

Program

Sequence

Designation

No.

Angle

for

Straight

Angle

for

Multiple

.

Notes

Data

2.

Inch/Metric

3.

Inch

4.

F

No.

of

Repetitions

Designation

with

/Metric

codes

Designation

No.

Line

Thread

|

indicates

output

input

feedrate

for

is

set

is

/mm

maximum

by

set

setting

by

or

U(P)53

Q(P)

A(B)33

cumulative

setting

feedrate

P4

4

L8

3

B

parameter

(#600lDo).

/rev

value.

can

#6007D3-

switched

be

U(P)

P4

Q(P)

L8

A(B)33

3

B

by

53

4

G98,

G99.

B,

B B

0

B

O

0

2

i

Program

Sequence

function

G

Coordinate

Z,

X,

Feed

Thread

S-fyjiction

T-function

I,

/min

/rev

Address

No.

K,

and

Lead

O

N

G

Address1

W,

U.

input

2601

944.88

-

in

/

min

/rev

Commands

in.

in.)

(*99999-999

Inch

-

input

60960

mm

1270.00

-

mm

1

/min

/rev

1

0

mro

mm)

-

Metric

*21307.061

1

0.01

°-m:oooo

mm

/rev

0-99

0

-

0-99

0

-

output

Inch

9999

199

*838.8607

1(

*9999

0.

01

0.0001

9999

input

9999

2400.00

-

in

-

in

m

in.

mm)

/

min

50.0000

/rev

rev

/

2.

24000

mm

500.00

-

mm/rev

mm

2

Metric

input

mm

/

min

/rev

List

1

0

mm)

0-99

0

0-99

0

Table

Metric

F

E

S2 S4

T3

T4

*8388.607

(*99999.999

1

-

0.01

Mÿ.OOOO

R

Program

of

output

Inch

9999

-

9999

-

199

-

*330.

(*9999.9999

0.01

0.0001-19.6850

-

9999

-

M-function

No.

of

Angle

for

Straight

Multiple

i

Parenthesized

2

For

U

Repetitions

Designation

Dwell

Program

Sequence

Angle

for

,

P

No.

angle

Designation

No.

Designation

Line2

Thread

designation

data

indicates

of

maximum

included

0.001

angle

0

999

-

99999.

-

1

-

9999

1

9999

-

0

99999999

-

*360.000°

0

-

0

360°

-

cumulative

G76,

for

999

sec

value.

see

2.8.26.8

0.001

Automatic

0

999

-

99999.

-

9999

1

-

1

9999

-

99999999

0

-

*360.000°

0

-

0

360°

-

Threading

999

sec

Cycle

(G76).

3

2.1.2

LIST

OF

ADDRESS

CHARACTERS

AND

FUNCTION

CHARACTERS

Address

A

B

c

D E

F

G

H

1

J

K

L

M

Angle

Spindle

for

User

Depth

Specifications

designation

shift

multiple

macro

of

cut

Preparatory

User

macro

X-component

(radius

value

User

macro

Z-component

value Incremental

Number

of

Miscellaneous

Table

angle

cornering

character

and

number

for

precise

for

normal

function

character

arc

of

value)

character

arc

of

value

subprogram

function

tor

G01

01

multiple

___

(G-function)

center,

variable

2.3

Address

Meaning

and

of

cutting

feed

and

canned

lead

repetition

(M-function)

Gill,

thread,

and

,

Characters

included

cycles

precise

normal

cycle

thread

G

13

to

angle

G

angle

designation

G71

for

lead

for

lead

parameter,

16

angle

for

to

cutting

beveling

and

G76

coordinate

B:

O:

Basic

Optional

O

B

O

B.

O

B,

O

B,

B

O

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

Sequence

Program

Dwell,

user

Subprogram

sequence

Radius

Spindle

Tool

X-axis

User

Z-axis

X-axis

User

Z-axis

number

canned

macro

number

arc,

of

function

incremental

macro

incremental

coordinate

macro

coordinate

cycle

number

starting

rounding

(T-function)

character

starting

sequence

(

S-function)

command

value

value,

,

sequence

number,

tool

,

maximum

tool

coordinate

value,

number,

radius

dwell,

canned

value

spindle

memory

canned

cycle

program

cycle

revolution

number

cycle

parameter

number,

ending

parameter

B.

B, B,

B,

B.

B,

B B

O

O O

B

O O

O

B

O

B

4

E1A

Code

ISO

Code

Table

2,4

Function

Characters

Function

Remarks

Blank

BS

Tab

CR

SP

ER

UC

LC

2-4-5

0

a

bits

2-4-7

bits

+ +

to

9

z

to

/

Del

NuL

BS

HT

LF/NL

CR

SP

%

(

)

to

0

to

A

/

DEL

Error

Disregarded

in

significant

in

ISO

data

area

in

EIA

Disregarded Disregarded

stop

(comment

out

(comment

in

User

characters block

(Including

(EOB)

User

skip

end)

macro

start)

operator

All

Mark)

EIA:

Special

code

of

End

Disregarded

Space

Block

Rewind

Upper

Lower

shift

Control

Disregarded,

Minus

9

Z

Numerals Address

sign,

Optional

Disregarded

Parameter

starting

*

r

(

3

$

?

Notes:

1,

Characters

2.

Information

3.

Tape

code

#

*

t

3

$

?

other

between

(EIA

or

than

ISO)

Decimal

Sharp

Asterisk

Equal

Left

bracket

Right

User

User User

the

Control

is

point

(Variable

(Multiplication

mark

bracket

macro macro

macro

operator

above

cause

Out

and

automatically

designation)

operator)

error

Control

in

In

recognized.

significant

is

ignored

EIA:

area.

data

as

insignificant

Special

code

data.

5

2.1.3

Numerals

as

the

coordinates

can

They Decimal

dress

Coordinate

Angle

words.

words

Feedrate

Time

words:

EXAMPLE

5.

-

XI

20.

5

Y

IG99)F.

(G98)F25.6—

G04P1.-

Normally,

inputted,

(or

0.0001

ter

setting

as

1"

"

to

parameter

2.1.4

the

In

becomes

CRT.

•

When

•

When

the

While

on

the

neglected.

the

MEM

dicates

of

end

2.1.5

During

read

lor

blocks

in

for

can

BUFFER

in

the

In

of

advance

the

contain

DECIMAL

containing

dimensional

(distance),

inputted

be

points

words.

•

word:

U,

X15.000 Y20.500

FO.

2*

—

(for

F25

(for

Dwell

-

when

the

control

inch

,

the

(or

mm

1

#6019D6.

LABEL

following

the the

punched

the

normal

advance

follow-on

effective,

power

RESET

label

When

(memory)

presence

part

tool

or

data

and

operation

up

POINT

a

data

can

be

X,

,

B

A

F,

E

P

[

mm

mm/rev

20

32

F

mm/rev

50)

F

.

1

data

without

or

control

inch

1

FUNCTION

cases

and

supply

operation

function

skip

up

tape

LSK

or

of

program.

RECISTER

operation,

and

compensation

operation.

radius

up

to

compensation

to

128

characters

PROGRAMMING

decimal

of

angle,

from

used

Z,

]

mm mm

)

000

regards

1

deg.),

may

or

the

LSK

to

is

EDIT

a

point

addresses

time

punched

in

the

K,

I,

or

X15.0000

or

Y20.5000

or

F0.2000

(for

F25.

or

(forF32)

sec

decimal

a

"1"

but

be

0.001

label

displayed

is

turned

is

effective,

is

the

first

displayed

(editing)

pointer

one

block

R

(inch

as

made

deg.).

skip

executed.

at

is

compensationÿ

4

blocks

is

executed.

of

computing

including

may

speed.

tape

following

1

in.

in./rev

F24)

60

in

point

0.001

with

to

interpret

function

on.

EOB

on

the

mode,

the

leading

of

data

computed

mode,

are

data

required

One

be

or

/min

mm

a

parame-

Refer

on

the

all

code

CRT

is

two

read

block

EOB.

used

to

MDI.

ad¬

is

data

it

in¬

are

The

are

not

•

MOO.

•

codes

M

mandnijs

2.1.6

A

high-speed

standard

consecutive

cutting

time

stop

this

function

ous

thread

ed

stop

NOTES:

This

1.

where

Programming

2.

Block-to-block

quired

not

is

this

Function

ation

mode,

blocks

read

M01

HICH-SPEED

in

\U)2.

.

maximum)

(6

to

stop

including

advance.

buffer

serve

to

group

(G32)

or

between

(Note

cutting

time

between

function

the

control

to

compute

eliminated

stopping

(M93,

of

consecutive

inter-block

M30

ad\

for

of

linear

blocks

a

is

for

stop

time,

set

aiu

BUFFER

register

high-speed

blocks

interpolation

2).

This

smooth

blocks.

effective

is

provided

Circular

time

tool

or

use

M92)

blocks

stoppage

the

following

by

parameter

e-readmg

RECISTER

is

specified

reduced

is

permits

cutting

for

Interpolation

due

radius

remains.

2.7.4

(optional).

up

.

installed

cutting.

(G01),

to

in

with

G22

and

with

to

the

compensation

To

Buffering

When

to

5

time

is

M

codes

com

as

in

thread

zero

continu¬

shorten¬

G23

Radius

time

reduce

in

M93

reduced

the

If

a

the

by

option

re¬

oper¬

zero.

PROGRAM

2.2

NUMBER

AND

SEQUENCE

NUMBER

2.2.1

Program

for

Up

character

program

trol,

ploying

One

ends

in

placed

ER

parts

NOTES:

1.

the

to

and

program

with

*0

<

PROGRAM

(or

The

/M02;

of

PROCRAM

numbers

purpose

4

digits

"0"

numbers

up

an

option.

M02,

the

at at

the

0.

1

%

ISO

at

of

the

tape.

blocks

,

/M30;

programs.

may

as

to

199

begins

M30

end

WITH

NO.

for

NUMBER

may

of

program

be

program

can

or

with

or

of

main

of

subprograms.

it-

MO

2.

if-

10

code)

optional

,

/M99;

be

written

be

registered

999

M99.

0

1

is

punched

are

prefixed

numbers.

a

programs,

to

programs

identification.

after

an

address

to

Up

in

can

be

registered

program

M02

number,

and

4.

3

2

-------

-----

PROGRAM

block

not

WITH

NO.

on

both

skip

regarded

the

M30

M

1234

such

are

M99

9

99

con¬

,

%

end

as

em¬

and

is

as

enc

6

2.

It

(#6201Do).

and

to

as

2.2.2

Integers

ten

following

numbers.

Sequence

blocks,

meaning

Therefore,

tial,

and

any

sequence

sequential

numbers.

When

searching

to

search

.

hand

NOTES:

1.

Five

sequence

is

possible

ineffective

M99

make

the

a

sign

SEQUENCE

consisting

an

numbers

and

do

sequence

and

they

duplicated

numbers

or

specify

more

or

with

to

make

succeeding

of

program

NUMBER

address

not

may

number

for

digits

number.

a

the

as

of

up

are

reference

have

of

sequential,

be

numbers,

is

are

convenient

sequence

program

must

parameter

reading

a

program

ER

end.

to

4

digits

character

any

influence

machining

also

possible.

numbers,

numbers

not

change

(EIA)

N

numbers

as

be

M02,

of

end,

and

(ISO)

or

%

may

be

sequence

as

for

on

the

processes.

non-sequen-

using

not

Generally,

sequence

sure

be

before¬

written

M30,

writ¬

as

2.3

COORDINATE

Generally,

tions

are

tems

words

axes

and

directions

2.3.1

Address

dinate

Axis

Main

Radius

Value

for

Circular

a

Interpola¬

tion

commands

and

called

consist

coordinate

of

numerals

.

COORDINATE

of

Coor¬

Words

X,

Z

U,

W

I,

K

R+

WORDS

for

setting

for

address

representing

WORDS

Absolute

target

Incremental

(U:

Direction

W:

Direction

Incremental

point

start

circular

(I:

X-axis

K:

Z-axis

Radius

movements

words,

characters

Meaning

coordinate

position

distance

and

arc.

component

component)

value

of

in

coordinate

and

coordinate

for

dimensions

position

X-axis,

in

Z-axis)

in

center

circular

axis

direc¬

sys¬

desired

of

between

of

,

arc

of

2.

When

quence

read,

3.

Blocks

be

searched

data

2.2.3

Those

cluded

that

switch

OPTIONAL

blocks

are

block,

for

EXAMPLE

12

When

the

neglected,

this

block

1234

N

"l,"

With

NOTES:

The

1.

ed

while

buffer

read,

to

skip

While

2.

this

The

3.

and

two

number,

and

without

contained

in

neglected

when

that

N1234

switch

and

is

read

G01

"1"

optional

the

resister.

subsequent

the

reading

function

block

1

/

i$

or

no

which

number

G01

when

may

blocks

skip

basic

a

more

only

more

sequence

for

with

in

BLOCK

the

X100

for

12

as

X100,.

be

block

blocks

or

ineffective.

is

12

blocks

one

searching

respect

the

blocks.

SKIP

"In"

between

external

"n"

/3

on,

is

switch

the

if

omitted.

skipping

are

Once

switching

.

punching

9

/

-

one.

have

is

numbers

(n

In

optional

on.

is

the

being

the

an

is

retrieved

is

to

(/l

(1-9)

=

and

Z200;

for

process

blocks

on

out

option

the

same

performed.

can

address

the

19)ÿ

-

the

block

entire

3

is

/

into

read

have

ineffective

is

programs,

function,

and

also

is

in¬

end

block

on,

is

se¬

of

skip

is

execut¬

the

been

Note:

and

X

follow

For

cremental

2.3.2

The

control

Z-axis.

axes,

two

axes

mands,

2.3.3

OUTPUT

2.

3.

3.1

The

minimum

punched

by

Metric

Inch

X-axis

When

Z

are

G90

not

according

details,

refer

Inputs.

SIMULTANEOUS

provides

Number

when

,

movement

LEAST

INCREMENT

Least

of

commanded

and

X

will

INPUT

Input

input

or

tape

Least

system

is

specified

0.

0.0001

G91

and

as

fixed

to

simultaneously

.

Z

absolute

G90/G91

2.3.5

CONTROLLABLE

two-axis

the

in

the

For

not

occur

INCREMENT

Increment

units

that

are

MDI

Input

1

001

Increment

x

mm

in.

diameter.

for

used,

are

designation.

Absolute

control

same

axis

can

shown

s

10

0.01

0.001

addresses

value

and

AXES

for

controllable

block,

without

LEAST

AND

commanded

be

below.

(

times

10

input

mm

in

and

X-

is

unit)

In¬

and

com¬

7

2.3.3.

Inch

1

/MM

Inch/MM

Selection

parameter

by

loo!

ol

(or

mm

these

In

eration

NOTES

1.

units.

0.01

•

Programming

•

Write

•

Programming

•

Program

If

NC

into

mm

times

the

ll

contents

the

tenth

3.

When

the

out

the

Multiplication

A.

unit)

It

does

time,

10X

same

depending

EXAMPLE

G04

GOO

Least

input

of

value

I

set

0.0001

mm

increment

must

operation

editing

:

tape

or

stored

increment,

the

increment

machine

of

the

tape4-,

stored"

"as

increment

is

not

angle,

set

is

address

U--.

•

L

is

Increment

selected

Input

selection

multiplication

#6006D5-

must

inch)

,

and

made

be

for

programmed

intended

of

the

stored

the

effective

function

as

on

,«

in

operation

in

MDI

operation

an

in

the

system

NC

tape

move

will

commanded

program

stored

regardless

system.

factor

for

etc

effective

word

type

Not

—

Multiplied

by

G20/G21

factor

always

offset

system,

the

unit

mode.

by

equipment

machine dimensions.

is

are

stored

by

dimensions.

figures

10X

distance

on

the

When

multiplication

(#6006D5

multiplied

is

command.

of

G

multiplied

(Cont'd)

setting

xl/xlO

be

is

the

in

TAPE

in

MEMORY

m

EDT

0.001

will

switched

ten

punched

is

of

(10

designation

10

by

#6OO1D0.

is

written

possible

following

of

0.01

mode.

mm

set

move

in

memory,

times

punched

are

switching

times

command

1),

=

by

10

by

(Distance)

optional.

is

made

in

mm.

mode.

is

by

0.01

ten

when

one

or

out

the

input

factor

the

or

10

(Time)

0.001

in

op¬

fed

the

on

of

only.

of

not

2.3.4

Maximum

are

MAXIMUM

programmable

shown

Maximum

Metric

Output

Inch

Output

In

absolute

must

axis

value.

PERLY

MUM

The

apply

in

The

mum

2.3.5

Both

be

•

THE

IF

PROGRAMMABLE

above

to

distance

addition

accumulative

Maximum

Metric

Inch

Note:

least

These

output

ABSOLUTE

absolute

used

for

Absolute

and

X

Z

EXAMPLE:

PROGRAMMABLE

below.

Metric Inch

input

Metric Inch

input

programming,

not

exceed

MACHINE

MOVE

A

maximum

move

to

system

values

increment.

input

the

control.

input

is

.

•

X-

values

Programmable

input

move

the

maximum

MAY

COMMAND

VALUE

programmable

command

must

value

values

shown

Accumulative

±99999.999

±9999.9999

are

AND

INCREMENTAL

and

specified

•

Z-

DIMENSIONS

move

of

Values

±8388. ±320.

607

2601

±21307.061

•±838.8607

amount

programmable

NOT

FUNCTION

OVER

IS

GIVEN.

values

addresses

not

exceed

below.

Values

not

determined

incremental

the

by

command

mm

in

mm

in

of

THE

I,

K,

X,

the

mm

in

INPUTS

input

addresses

each

PRO¬

MAXI¬

also

R

U,

maxi¬

by

can

W.

2.

Least

luo!

s',

Inch

#60071)

8

3.

motion.

stem

Metric

Inch

2

output

is

output

or

j.

Least

made

output

metric

Output

increment

Selection

by

Least

(Radius

0.

0.00005

output

Increment

is

of

parameter

Output

X-axis

0005

mm

selected

is

the

minimum

metric

(#6007D3).

Increment

value)

in.

system

0.001

0.0001

by

unit

or

Z-axis

mm

parameter

inch

in.

of

•

Incremental

U

es

EXAMPLE:

•

Absolute

used

EXAMPLE:

and

m

one

W.

input

U---

block

X-

U-

and

•

is

specified

•

W

•

incremental

mixedly.

•

W-

Z--.

by

;

input

the

address¬

be

can

NOTE:

and

tive

When

addresses

W

are

used

in

one

.

X

block,

and

the

U

or

latter

addresses

is

effec¬

Z

The

center

addresses

must

dimension

I

be

.

and

specified

K

for

designation

by

the

incremental

of

arc-

and

X

U

and

Note:

values

the

Fig.

Address

2b

2

ill

2

Z:

W:

Since

diameter,

in

half

of

2.1

Incremental

X

Z

U

W

I

K

R*

Hi

2

Hi

2

Hi

2

I

Absolute Incremental

X

and

the

values.

Absolute

Increment

System

Absolute

Input

Incremental

Input

Incremental

Input

Incremental

Input

+x

W,

Zj

Input

U

are

the

Coordinate

w>

2,

z,

Input

designated

actual

Designation

Diameter

W,

movement

Values

Radius

by

and

the

is

Table

2.

5

Position

Move

Distance

point

ing

Distance

ing

point

Direct

As

effective

TAPE,

MEM

modes

MDI

mode

EXAMPLE:

Incremental

•

in

X-axis

Z-axis

in

of

in

X

arc

Z-axis

arc

axis-direction

amount

programming

G

code

G90

G91

shown

below,

only

Addresses

Auxiliary

interpolation

Meaning

direction

X-axis Z-axis

to

X,

Z

U,

W

X,

Z

U,

W

G91

move

data,

direction

center

direction

center

circular

of

Absolute

Incremental

G90

addresses

GOO

command

I,

always

are

(Note)

from

arc

Meaning

G91

and

X

command

G90

Absolute

Incremental

Absolute

Incremental

X40.

etc.,

R,

K,

incremental

(Note)

start¬

command

commands

Z

and

;

Z50.

of

are

.

command

G91

Incremental

influ¬

Not

enced

90

and

G

circular

commands.

by

G91.

Cases

mental

*

When

selected,

where

commands)

special

G90

G

and

are

code

G91

used.

G91

(basic)

I

(absolute

codes

or

can

and

II

(option)

be

incre¬

used.

can

G91

and

the

is

G90

in

the

block,

same

.

G01

fltective,

incremental

same

the

G90

and

NOTE:

together

is

in

effective

EXAMPLE.

Gÿl

become

block.

in

not

one

X80.

this

both

be

If

written

G

block,

the

91

programmed

are

they

later

;

ZfeO.

commands

Z

and

X

written

only

axes

is

.

9

2.3.6

X-AXIS

DIAMETER/RADIUS

SWITCHING1-

2.4

RAPID

TRAVERSE

RATE

Addresses

are

specified

diameter

with

ped

addresses

the

diameter

bolh

made

by

O'

Diameter

1:

Radius

+x

X.

(a)

In

the

ameter

Address

command

Address

command

X-axis

display

Tool

position

offset

Tool

data

coordinate

system

Nose

Feedrate

in

tion

value

coordinate

for

radius

X-axis

Radius

for

R

circular

interpolation

90

G G

Parameters

cornering,

70

G94

-

G

-

multiple

D,

ing,

Q,

P,

R

X

and

by

designation.

DIAMETER

X

and

the

setting

designation

Resignation

2

x>

case

Designation

X

U

position

work

R

F,

E

direc¬

,

I

data

,

76,

for

and

corner¬

,K,

I

U

for

diameter

/RADIUS

can

be

radius.

of

Di¬

Fig

Table

Diameter

Programming

Diameter

Diameter mental

Diameter

Radius

X-axis

value.

When

the

used

The

parameter

+x

(b)

.

2

2.

2.6

value

incre¬

value

value/min

value

coordinate

This

control

switching

for

designation

switching

#6006D3.

X«

In

the

dius

Programming

Radius

incremental

value

/rev

words

is

called

is

equip¬

option,

is

X.

HZ

—

case

of

Designation

Radius

value

_

of

ra¬

2.4.1

2.

4.

1.1

The

rapid

for

the

Manual

erse

rates

dependent

determined

rapid

are

traverse

set

axes.

each

in

these

in

other,

ent

times

override

100%

4.

1.2

are

For

paths

For

and

available.

parameter

2.

U)

set

(p:

(2)

The

upper

The

listed

limit

Refer

for

2.4.2

G

and

code

G

FEED

E

function

code

G99 G98

Note:

Function

Since

F,

effective

However,

must

code

RAPID

Rapid

traverse

Positioning

Rapid

differ

on

by

parameters

by

When

the

axial

direction

axial

and

the

among

normally

rapid

of

the

Fo

(#6231).

Range

each

at

some

Least

rapid

limit

Metric

Inch

upper

values.

set

is

to

the

definite

FUNCTION

listed

below

Designation Designation

For

the

Designation.

E

codes

until

when

be

designated.

TRAVERSE

Traverse

motion

(GOO)

Traverse

among

the

machine

the

machine

rates

determined

tool

is

directions

end

points

these

not

traverse

basic

constant

a

Rapid

rapid

is

of

axis,

suitable

output

traverse

shown

Input

for

limit

The

according

the

machine

value.

must

is

commanded.

details,

modal,

are

F,

RATE

Rate

is

used

for

and

(RAPID).

axes

the

since

specification

tool

builders.

by

in

advance

moved

in

rapid

simultaneously,

are

independent

are

reached

motions.

straight.

Therefore,

rates,

traverse

feed

rate

Traverse

traverse

multiple

increment)

can

rate

below.

24,000

2,400

X-axis

optimum

(F-

be

Function

of

feedrate

of

feedrate

refer

to

the

builder's

tool

AND

designated

to

speed

value

machine.

these

E

codes

are

switched,

for

the

motion

The

they

and

The

the

machine

for

individual

traverse

motions

of

at

differ¬

Fo,

25%,

rates,

set

by

Rate

rates

can

of

be

2.8.29

codes

p/sec.

125

to

set

/min

mm

m/mm

is

half

of

upper

manual,

E-FUNCTION)

before

mm

in

mm/min.

/rev.

Feed

in

are

given.

new

for

trav¬

are

each

motion

50%

are

a

be

the

F,

F

10

2.4.

:i)

(2)

2.1

Tool

be

feed)

The

the

Feed

Per

feed

specified

.

feed

F

andEcodes

per

with

ranges

Revolution

revolution

(normal

F

that

are

can

as

(C99

the

of

feed)

be

follows.

Mode)

spindle

or

specified

EXAMPLE

F200

case,

/rev.

;

•

;

•

In

case

of

F32.

feedrate

the

x

350

+x

is:

rpm

can

(fine

E

by

G99

G01

In

F

x

the

S

U10000

above

=2.0

mm

(rpm)

S350

Metric

output

Inch

output

These

restrictions

Metric

Inch

Notes

I.

2.

NOTES:

A

1.

2.

Any

F

not

EXAMPLE

Mode,

G99

Metric

input

Inch

input

Metric

input

Inch

input

feed

ranges

depending

output

.

Program

a

range

the

Refer

minus

operate

F-250

12,000

upper

performance

to

below

This

command

commands.

F

Format

F32

E34

F24

E26

F32

E34

F

24

E26

are

F(E)

feed

that

limit

the

"F0"

value

If

properly.

;

E

and

Range

Feed

of

F0.01-F500.00

E0.

0001

.

FO

0001

E0.

000004

.

FO

01

E0.

0003

_

F0.

001-F50

F0.

000010

subject

the

on

S

x

=

S

x

=

revolution

per

X-axis

the

may

limit

or

still

of

tool

data

not

mm/min

machine

causes

should

specified,

Wrong

Ranges

feed

-

E5CO.OOOO

F19.6850

-

E19.

-

F1270.00

-

E1270.

-

to

the

spindle

24,000 2,4000

within

component

1,200

be

machine.

the

builder's

errors.

be

the

/revolution

/rev

mm

/rev

ini

rev

685000

in

/rev

mm/rev

0000

mm

/rev

.0000

in

rev

7:

.000000

E50

in

l

Jrev

following

speed

mm/min

ln/min

remains

/mm.

in

reduced

specified

machine

S.

such

by

manual.

for

will

7

4.

700

m/ain

•

Values

of

terpolation

when

EXAMPLE

two

G99

S100

U60.

G01

the

In

S

x

F

EXAMPLE

G99 G03

the

In

F

x

F

axes

1

above

=0.5

500

=

/

=

S1000

U---

above

S

=

21

S

command

represent

are

(rpm)

W40.

case

mm/rev mm/min

+

3002

r-

LX-axis

TANGENTIAL

YUStU.VL/'

/Zoo

2

(rpm)

W--

case,

0.2

/rev)

(mm

mm/min

200

>/fx2

at

linear

the

tangential

simultaneously

;

F50

,

the

feedrate

1000

x

4002

T~

Lz-axis

feedrate

y'

I

100

,

MM/MIN

(a)

;

F20

feedrate

the

x

+

fz2

or

circular

rpm

feedrate

component

MM/MIN

;

1000

(rpm)

nxDRATE

700

MM

/MIN

feedrate

controlled.

is

component

is:

in¬

3.

Feedrate

X-axis

commands

must

be

given

the

in

direction

radius.

in

of

CENTER

X

"'ÿ00

I

\

!«/HIN

l

,

fx

wfT

(b)

+i

11

2.4.2.

(1)

(2)

Metric

Output

Inch

Output

Notes

1.

2.

NOTES

Do

1.

values

Commands

2.

speeds

EXAMPLE

2

Feed

Tool

feed

/mm

feed

F

G

Metric

with

codes

98

Mode

in

The

with

Input

Inch

Input

Metric

Input

Inch

Input

.

Program

the

X-axis

ceed

half

EXAMPLE

G01

G

96

(Metric

The

upper

the

not

C°S

G01

limitation

builder’s

to

is

write

in

20000

X

to

performance.

tool value

Per

Minute

F

be

codes.

is

F

specified

that

as

Code

Range

can

range

Format

F50

32

F

F50

42

F

feed-per-minute

above

U

300.

component

value

speed

the

output,

limit

imposed

Refer

manual.

set

be

F

in

radius

command

X-axis

the

in

F700

(C98

can

follows.

Feed

FI.

-

F0.01

-

FI.

F0.01

upper

F12QQ0

metric

is

to

This

parameter

m

;

Mode)

in

be

programmed

Range

of

feed

24000.

F

F944.8

-

F60960.

F24000.00

-

values

will

limit

,

input)

further

by

the

of

the

upper

FO

direction

mm/min

per

mm/min

in

mm/min

in/min

so

not

feedrates.

subject

machine

#6228.

or

negative

indicate

minute

that

ex¬

limit

or

EXAMPLE

G'tS G01

In

F

(mm/min)

EXAMPLE

G98 G03

In

F

2,4.3

1

,

U

3000

case,

this

500

=

2

;

X---

case,

this

200

=

AUTOMATIC

/

DECELERATION

Acceleration

and

for

cutting

without

programming.

W4000

3002

Z

fx2

X

+

and

*-Y-axis

CENTER

feed

F500

+

40O2

L

X-axis

component

\+

400

MM/MIN

(a)

F200

2

+

fz

MM/MIN

(b)

<w

ACCELERATION

deceleration

are

automatically

300

!

1

!ÿ

component

MM/MIN

;

Is

I

for

rapid

AND

traverse

performed

F

700

*

Values

interpolation

when

rate

trolled

12

nc/rain

of

.

F

command

represent

two

axes

at

linear

the

are

simultaneously

circular

or

tangential

FEEDRATE

700

MM/MIN

feed-

con¬

2.4.3.

Traverse

the

In

matic

(See

Fig.

•

Positioning

Manual

•

Manual

•

Manual

1

Acceleration

And

following

acceleration

2.3.) (GOO)

rapid

continuous

HANDLE

Manual

operation,

and

traverse

feeding

And

Deceleration

Feed

the

deceleration

(RAPID)

feeding

(HANDLE)

pattern

(JOG)

is

of

linear.

Rapid

auto¬

v

EXAMPLE

VELOCITY

Rapid

eration

set

by

2.4.3.

Cutting

the

In

matic

tential

•

Cutting

traverse

constant

parameter.

2

Acceleration

Feed

following

acceleration

curve.

feed

V

VELOCITY

rate

of

operation,

(See

(G01

F.

coo

TIME

Fig.

and

rapid

(#6280

And

and

Fig.

to

2.3

the

acceleration

traverse

#6287)

to

Deceleration

the

deceleration

2.4.)

G03)

rate

pattern

is

can

of

/decel¬

be

auto¬

expo¬

GOO

G01

GOO

G01

NOTE:

Sll

X->

Z-

X--

X-

Z---

S22

X--.

M03

•

Z-.

••

F

Z-.-

•••

M03

Z-

F-..

;

Z

The

machine

issued

is

;

command

•

S

Spindle

;

•

M05

Spindle

i

•

:

;

•••

F...

two-digit

when

.

CW

:

stop

;

BCD

S

and

Sll:

S22

i

output

two-digit

Effective

:

Effective

sent

is

to

command

the

Feedrate

vals

parameters.

by

NOTE:

parameters

respective

unless

2.5

time

feedrate

and

automatic

The

are

machines.

required

is

it

SPINDLE-SPEED

(S-FUNCTION)

spindle

each

block,

a

design

S

the

(rpm),

move

a

is

executed

or

after

to

2-DICIT

speed

address

S

code

command

execution

and

the

machine

2.5.1

The

lowing

For

speed

manual.

When

in

tool mand

mand

Refer

TIME

Fig.

constants

is

bias

(#6092,

acceleration

set

to

the

Do

for

PROCRAMMINC

is

specified

(S00

S

and

its

refer

to

the

and

will

construction

together

the

completion

tool

2.4

at

2

at

2kpps

are

set

#6093)

set

/deceleration

optimum

not

special

values

change

application.

FUNCTION

two

by

S99)

to

corresponding

machine

an

depend

with

builder's

.

code

S

on

(Whether

the

of

tool

manual.

inter¬

msec

intervals

for

the

setting

digits

spindle

builder's

are

issued

the

machine

the

com¬

move

movement).

S

the

fol¬

com¬

2.5.2

(1)

(2)

s

S

4-DICIT

digits

Four

specify

to

When

M04

with

to

the

reaches

details,

manual

S

M03

(reverse

EXAMPLE

S1000

START

THE

PROGRAMMING

following

spindle

the

command

(spindle

running),

block

the

speed

to

refer

;

M03

RPM

1000

I

START

%

OF

BLOCK

is

given

forward

after

given

the

A

(StUDDD)

S

speed

in

a

in

running)

control

the

spindle

the

by

machine

ACTUAL

SPEED

COMPLETION

COMMAND

M

+

rpm.

block

S

tool

SPINDLE

are

together

or

proceeds

speed

code.

builder's

OF

used

the

For

-

i

13

2.5.2

(3)

S

(4)

NOTES:

1

.

The

on

too!

Negative

2.

When

digit

override"

With

3.

dle

M

to

write

the

gear

and

4.

When

tion,

function

can

S

4-DICIT

commands

dle

stops

mand

(or

M04)

to

ing

When

start

dle

be

g.ven

st

Iccted

lower

the

builder's

command

machine

gear

codes,

preselect

the

machine

ratios,

other

the

be used

PROGRAMMING

are

the

at

is

retained.

is

gi\en,

theScommand.

S

command

MQ3

by

within

by

spindle

of

limit

S

commands

control

option

tools

first

the

S

command.

tool

the

drive.

manual

function,

changes

write

desired

speeds

spindle

the

ratio

details.

control

spindle

with

the

modal.

command,

M05

Therefore,

the

is

changed

M04,

or

the

range

gear.

the

spindle

for

must

provided

is

can

be

with

the

builder

is

provided

maximum

instruction

Although

spindle

S

of-spmdle

Refer

the

not

the

built

which

can

be

applicable

gear

Refer

for

various

at

speed

(CONT'D)

A"

the

when

runs

after

command

speed

to

the

low-speed

be

with

"Spindle

into

the

specified

ratio,

the

to

number

the

with

commanding

"G50

the

spin¬

S

com¬

M03

accord¬

the

spin¬

should

speed

depends

machine

limit.

programmed.

4-

S

the

speed

it.

main

spin¬

by

code

M

then,

and

of

data

of

ratios,

gear

this

func¬

S--'

The

fiaurob

ber

arc

the

machine

When

sinnilt

chine

•

the

or

the the

this,

For

Tool

set

memory

offset

T

codes

are

T

command

NOTES:

•

When

tion

med

to

determined

a

move

meouj.lv.

tool

two

T

command

execution

offset

.

given,

the

is

with

2.8.20

t

T

used

tool

command

design

commands

refer

number

are

modal,

they

is

Tool

provided,

sign

Tool

for

builder's

execution

and

is

of

the

to

the

designation

remain

given.

Nose

(+

or

Nose

L_

tin-

by

the

and

const

are

executed

move

machine

and

executes

and

Radius

the

T

-)

.

Radius

Tool

(Nose

Direction

radius

designation

machine.

manual.

code

T

a

depend

will

ruction

upon

command

builder's

specifies

therefore,

effective

Compensationt

code

must

For

the

Compensation.

offset

value

of

compensation

of

VH>1

1

mini

Keler

are

on

to

issued

the

.

simultaneously,

completion

manual.

tool

until

be

details,

number

(R)

tool

position

once

off¬

they

another

op¬

program¬

refer

memory)

nose

mi

of

2.5.3

(I)

(2)

2.6

2.6.1

Three the

4-DIGIT

S

function

This

A

mand

mable

machine

Basically,

as

way

is

it

but

controlled

rotary

corresponding

details

the

machine

the

TOOL

T

3-

DIG

digits,

tool

number.

T

TT

PROCRAMMINC

to

is

output

freely

interface.

function

this

the

S

4-digit

normally

used

spindle

the

of

on

to

S

tool

S

command

builder's

switch

FUNCTION

IT

PROGRAMMING

following

Leading

1

ool

(0

-

B

modify

the

through

used

is

command

to

set

speeds

controlled

machine

command

speeds.

speeds,

manual.

(T-FUNCTION)

the

address

zeros

may

offset

9)

number

+

S

4-digit

the

in

A

the

control

T,

be

program¬

same

the

function,

manually

by

station

For

refer

specify

omitted.

com¬

the

to

•

For

system

2.8.23

2.6.2

(1)

(2)

code

T

designation

shift

Work

T

4-DIGIT

Four

digits

tool

the

number.

T

Programming

as

that

for

two-digit

(G50

T

Coordinate

PROGRAMMING

following

Tool

(0

Tool

T

4-digit

T

3-digit

tool

offset

for

work

Multi-Shift.

address

the

offset

16

or

-

selection

command

number

coordinate

refer

to

T

specifies

number

50)

the

is

except

designation.

same

for

14

Tool

number

(3)

For

applicable

refer

to

the

Specifications

a

b

tool

machine

number

tool

Tool

to

builder's

Offset

0-16

0-50

be

specified,

No.

manual.

(3)

Write

to

ing

control.

4.3.5

to

Values.

Memory,

6.2.3

these

operate

For

Displaying

For

follow

Work

data

the

in

machine

writing

the

procedure

Measurement

memory,

and

into

under

procedure,

Writing

Tool

Coordinate

described

Value

before

automatic

Tool

Direct

start¬

refer

Offset

in

Input+.

NOTES:

When

1.

command,

tool

should

from

might

2.

Tool

offset.

2.6.3

area

The

radius

data

tion

(1)

,

WORK

SHIFT

<1

TOOl

M1MUK'

i

Hour*

TOOL

>

MEMORY

CROUPS

TOOL

•

(19

TOOL

.

MEMORY

NOTE:

above

builder's

(2)

the

instantaneously.

be

area

the

occur.

offset

TOOL

compensation

in

OFFSET

which

are

entire

The

including

COORDINATE

MF.MORY

l.ROlP)

OFFSET

(:0

)

MA>

COORDINATE

(

10

1

MAX

WEAR

MEMORY

CROUPS

MAX.7*-'

RADIUS

For

the

Offset

manual.

"tool

The

function

memory

for

various

tool

coordinate

work

coordinate

tool

selection

work

coordinate

function,

ent

tool

number

a

turret

removed,

where

number

tool

stored

memory

the

options

r

I

No.

00

f

01

09

10

1

J$.

1

50

51

80

81

99

actually

Memory,

offset

directly

Nos.

compensations.

lathe

0or00

MEMORY

position

values,

called

is

orrsE7

_

X

1

i

:

1

refer

Nos."

correspond

and

memory

system)

Nos.

slntt

not

is

Therefore,

before

accidental

an

areas

are

MEMORY

2

usable

their

m

the

memory

begins

the

cancels

+

offset

other

and

Offset

of

shown

as

NO

R

7

range

the

to

specified

contents

Nos.

correspond

T

tunc

the

to

by

to

index

the

command,

collision

the

values,

compensa¬

Memory

below.

I

T

3-DICIT

T

BASIC

r

T

STAND,'

P

OFFSET

MEMORY

h

SUPPLEMENT

J

within

machine

by

to

the

are

However,

(for

setting

lion.

is

an

function.)

T

the

T

the

turret

tool

.

<.-D!C!T

IRD

the

tool

T

the

"offset

used

the

to

The

independ¬

2.6.4

When

set

is

the

TOOL

the

value

added

program

position.

coordinate

the

actual

memory

When

has

sons,

set

the

changed

the

again.

attained

(1)

Range

The

is

Output

Metric

Output

Inch

Output

(2)

Sign

a.

Store

Offset

viation

reference

-z

POSITION

offset

tool

corresponding

algebraically

and

Therefore,

values

tip

tool

in

advance

coordinate

due

tool

position

Thus,

without

of

tool

programmable

shown

Metric

Inch

Metric Inch

of

the

Memory.

below

Input

tool

from

+

5

3

5

K

input

tool

&

number

to

tool

the

of

must

the

as

value

tool

to

the

programmed

correcting

position

.

input

position

The

tool

the

which

X

+

\

tOC

TOOL

TION

-X

2.5

Fig.

OFFSETS

is

the

to

command

the

moved

is

difference

programmed

stored

be

offset

the

of

or

wear

offset

values

the

offset

range

Setting

0

*8388.607

-

*330

0

-

0

±9999.999

-

0

±838.8607

-

offset

position

tip

determined

is

-itf

RAMMED

POSI¬

specified,

offset

tool

to

into

value.

actual

some

machining

program.

value

of

tool

Range

2601

values

value

ACTUAL

TOOL

(6x.

2

the

value

offset

the

between

tool

other

should

offset

mm

in

mm

in

is

of

as

POSITION

DIAMETER)

off¬

number

in

the

and

tip

offset

tip

rea¬

be

is

value

the

in

the

zero.

de¬

15

2.6.4

(3)

TOOL

Description

mentioned

As

the

by

offset

address

value

number

program

moved

When

the

Once,

the

until

the the

is

difference

values

to

there

tool

the

tool

another

other

offset

compensated

.

OFFSET

(

T101

(+

<

TI15

(+

V

POSITION

tool

of

above,

T

corresponding

is

added

algebraically

the

offset

is

no

moves

tool

only

offset

always

number

offset

value

for

between

VALUE

T

6Xi,

T

5X2,

+

OFFSETS

position

and

to

the

position.

move

by

number

is

changed,

by

the

6ZX)

5Z2)

when

4

digits

command

and

command

the

number

to

the

is

designated.

is

the

old

(CONT'D)

offset

tool

the

is

to

the

tool

in

offset

is

designated,

offset

designated

offset

the

amount

and

new

motion

specified

moved,

tool

value

tip

the

value.

position

of

the

offset

m

is

block,

When

or

value

the

(5)

a.

Since

EXAMPLE

G50

X-..

GOO

S--

X--

Instructions

offset

position

Tool

the actual

offset

tool

is

selection

starts

ing

the

Tool

T-code

the

corresponding

code

T

the

other

EXAMPLE

T0202

GOO

Z--

M03

T0108

z...

for

commanding

offset

must

tool

is

code

;

to

modal,

is

•••

at

signal

move

the

starts

commanded.

T

;

is

executed

number

be

designated.

the

block

When

(BCD)

by

tool

it

designated.

The

tool

selected.

motion

to

ing

the

tool

Offset

made

motion

at

traverse

tool

position

by

corresponding

in

which

T-code

is

offset

the

offset

is

the

retained

number

is

made

number.

Tool

contents

offset

the

rapid

rate.

designat¬

is

fed

and

value

until

N02

offset

accord¬

of

number

is

to

the

read,

is

02.

16

(4)

+x

EXAMPLE

flOl

X

G01

T115

speed

Move

move

The

feedrate

the

by

block.

the

(GOO

or

the

in

number

.

£X>

(X

•

•Z-•

speed

G01

block

+<rz»!

2

+

Z)

;

F(E)

•

.

with

tool

of

command

Therefore,

F--0

containing

r

sZ1/

<52.

tool

should

•

offset

the

omit

COHFLETIOH

,

tfX.

2

;

•

that

feedrate

be

the

MOTION

OF

Z

+

.

(Block

offset

determined

is

effective

is

issued

offset

tool

2

1

.

2

3

the

of

motion)

command

before

When

b.

the written

the

T-code

tool

whose

should

offset

be

value

offset

tool

commanded

must

number

again.

be

changed,

re¬

is

EXAMPLE

GOO

T0202

G01

X-

G01

T0216

Note

that

case,

The

c.

by

T

the

angle

the

code

should

cutting

with

in

;

•

Z-

;

if

the

tool

of

taper

following

for

change

commanded

be

feed

•

F...

Tool

is

Tool

at

tool

indexing

procedure.

of

command.

replaced

the

number

cutting

tool

in

offset offset

cutting

motion

offset

the

can

number

with

motion

is

changed

starts.

be

block

16.

feedrate.

changed

number

together

is

02

made

in

thii

®

©

+x

.

d

EXAMPLE

T0202

GOO

X-*

G01

U*...

+¥l

When

are

issued

moves

the

above

by

the

T0202

When

cancel,

ber

0or00

The

tool

cancelled

EXAMPLE

GOO

T0202

X-..

G01

-w

T

the

to

the

difference

and

the

tool

the

position

.

;

.

Z-

F.

.

W-.

DIFFERENCE

BETWEEN

N*-'

T0216

MOVEMENT

T0216

Z

+

command

same

the

in

offset

case,

the

of

T0216.

position

code

T

(T

offset

Z...

F-

.

;

F---

with

T0216

OF

TOOL

T0202

AND

COMMAND

OF

WITHOUT

2

IN

STARTING

EXECUTION

the

and

block,,

position,

angle

taper

offset

the

offset

the

00)

must

is

instantaneously

•

;

OFFSET

2

COMMAND

(BEFORE

POINT

OF

COMMAND

move

the

Therefore,

is

value

is

required

offset

tool

be

commanded.

VALUE

2

command

nose

tool

corrected

between

num¬

THE

)

in

to

NOTES:

Tool

1.

operation

2.

The

or

The

3.

Automatic

When

4.

mand

the

5.

When

ecuted,

cally

6.

The

Zero

the

tool

the

med

2.6.5

With

this

Work

the

can

be

(1)

Shift

written

Shift

offset

cedure

(2)

The

M30

tool

G27

offset

state

tool

WORK

shifted

from

position

.

tool

offset

commanded.

is

offset

tool

Zero

the

control

or

by

offset

the

Zero

the

.

tool

offset

Return

is

commanded

is

of

offset

position.

COORDINATE

function,

Coordinate

through

values

into

Memory

memory

as

written

moment

the

offset

must

should

Return

executing

number

Return

offset

tool

must

Check

effective,

Zero

value

coordinate

System

the

m

the

(one

No.

for

writing

shift

is

cancelled

be

reset

is

RESET

be

(G27)

at

Return

is

desired

X

Work

group)

"00,"

is

values

described

cancelled

be

cancelled

(G28)

by

becomes

(auto

or

cancelled

is

cancelled

also

commanded

is

the

control

check

added

SYSTEM

systems

Setting

distances.

and

Z

Coordinate

with

by

offset

tool

become

below

by

before

is

commanded.

M02

or

operation,

(or

0

manual)

state

error,

to

the

SHIFT

function,

can

axes

System

which

the

values.

effective

.

RESET

also

M30

00).

automati¬

before

where

will

because

program¬

+

by

set

be

the

same

M02

before

com¬

is

If

the

be

G50,

pro¬

ex¬

etc.

©

01

G

GOO

The

into

GOO

T0200

...

+

u

X---

block

two

X---

w

.

F.

•

----

®

blocks.

;

Z...

Z-

T0200

of

EXAMPLE

•

Only

.it

cancel

rapid

T0216

;

can

traverse

;

The

motion

cancelled Tool

according

the

specified

and

X

be

motion

offset

is

moves

position

Z.

divided

is

rate.

.

to

by

made

a.

b.

c

.

d.

When

Position

key

That

ed

above

added.

X'

+

62

$-7

SHIFT

G40

coordinate

work

G40T

automatic

Absolute

when

is.

are

Tools

X

+

9

r

Zo

Xo/2

O

SHIFT

AXES

IAX/2

COORDINATE

coordinate

display

these

set,

the

are

not

I

ORIGINAL

+

AXES

Z

system

is

system

is

reset

coordinate

shift

values

shifted.

COORDINATE

Fig.

set

systems

2.6

is

by

are

is

set

ORG

list¬

simply

17

5

2.6

(CONT'D)

For

coordinate

shown

dinate

(3)

This

any

and

(4)

When

tem

shift

ment

subsequently

WORK

positive

shift

of

d

Shift

COORDINATE

shift

axes

above.

system

function

the

conditions

.

met

is

the

contents

Memory

values

the

become

operation

executed.

are

Xo

setting

are

values

shifted

and

is

executed

described

of

Work

rewritten,

effective

a,

b,

SYSTEM

AX

Zo

are

values.

Coordinate

c,

and

in

original

from

or

SHIFT

AZ,

the

at

in

the

d

above

the

direction

coor¬

each

a,

b,

Sys¬

new

mo¬

the

time

is

\

2L

z

X

z

.Hue

WEAR

1

tvX'l

memory

VALUE

v'lls-Ot

MEMORY

IHv'Ul

Nos.

NO.

o

OR

+

wear

.

NO

82

83

lu'lw

TOOL

81

The

cort

ory

as

is

£

01

c,

02 03

anc

OFFSET

tool

DCIOW

MEMORY

Nos

shown

TOOL

x

Z

X Z

X X

z

(5)

The

MENT

for

an

NOTES

1.

The

Shift

the

reset

2.

T

G50

The

has

Coordinate

2.6.6

cert.un

With

Memory,

ducted

in

No.

T

cific

compensate

(1)

With

of

T90

procedure

the

offset

shift

function

setting

operation

TODOO

tool

nothing

TOOL

the

from

the code

the

tool

AA

VALUE

Work

memory

command

00

;

offset

Shift

WEAR

tool

preset

the

part

command,

for

tool

following

offset

of

"6.2.3

DIRECT

Coordinate

No.

by

not

can

;

is

effective

changed

Tool

Work

value

setting

No

00

with

to

do

Memory.

COMPENSATION

wear

value

values

program

of

by

in

wear.

T-command,

01

Nos.

INPUT"

"00."

the

be

m

the

preset

can

any

means

order

-

WORK

Shift

Work

cancelled

to

in

cancelling

position

coordinate

these

contents

added

be

desired

of

automatically

to

are

19

MEASURE¬

is

effective

Memory

Coordinate

unless

"0."

No

offset

system

instructions

of

(T90AA)

Tool

in

to

tool

some

contents

the

changed.

with

it.

cancel

Work

Offset

or

offset

spe¬

+

de¬

19

NOTES.

1.

The

when

If

off

takes

2.

While

signal

sion,

is

or

time.

an

in

external

X

z

When

input

When

input

EXAMPLE

(When

T9012

WOP

offset

the

both

the

when

place

parameter

is

the

not

executed.

subtraction

This

automatic

which

Fig.

signal signal

is

;

value

command

input

this

.

turned

second

function

the

measuring

99

2.7

on)

The

value

ed

offset

change

signals

command

#6023D4

on

offset

executed

is

tool

wear

work

x

Zl

WOP WOM

content

to

T90AA

(closed)

While

is

size

instrument

the

is

on

•••

•

of

memory

No.

content

memory

No.

function

;

is

WOP

and

executed,

is

1,

if

=

twice

addition

0,

D4

=

also

useful

when

compensation

measurement

is

addition

•

subtraction

the

tool

92

of

the

12.

takes

executed.

WOM

no

WOP

a

in

or

subtractioi

the

addition

in

the

forming

system

by

utilized.

wear

is

add¬

tool

effect

are

chang<

or

WOM

succes¬

second

an

18

(2)

This The

No.

cified

to

Oflset

and

change

contents

(e.g.,

oÿ

7.

offset

tool

deducted

Memory

axes.

Tool

command

effected

is

the

of

81)

corresponding

No.

from

(eg.,

offset

wear

Tool

(e.g.,

the

(01

No.

compensation

follows.

as

Wear

01)

contents

01)

for

both

-

Value

the

to

are

of

19)

Memory

spe¬

added

Tool

the

X

INC

PRICED

PROCESS

For

which

tween

uring

should

pensation

which

should

"Connection

:

NC

MACHINING

PROCESS

example,

one

the

process

be

there

be

AUTOMATIC

COMPENSATION

INTERIM

WORKPIECE

(ONE

PIECE)

with

a

interim

workpiece

machining

as

shown

set

to

1

for

of

tool

wear.

no

is

interim

to

set

"0."

Manual."

SYSTEM

-

WORKPIECE

MEASURING

measuring

process

above,

proper

With

workpiece,

details,

For

SUBSEQUENT

PROCESS

system

present

is

and

the

#6023D4

automatic

system

a

in

be¬

meas¬

com¬

in

#6023D4

refer

of

block

t

+

+:

Buffering

Remote Remote

radius

Tool circular

Tool

radius

M92 M93

M94

M95

M96

M97

intersection

M98:

M99:

M100

2.7.3

(M91,

to

The

interruption

Subroutine

109:

to

PROCRAM

M90)

following

Not

+

M

function.

1

4

of

blocks

tool

compensation

tool

compensation

compensation:

mode

path

compensation:

computing

program

(for

used

INTERRUPTION

are

codes

used

mode

call

end

special

for

application)

ON/OFF

for

the

X-axis

Z-axis

program

2.7

MISCELLANEOUS

(M-FUNCTION)

miscellaneous

The

each

machine

of

stop

are

Program

Optional

End

their

M

and

M

code

except

M

codes

with

M

CODES

M02,

M01,

the

NC

provided.

of

End

commands

For

respective

a

tool

stop

program

tape

these

address

of

machine,

the

tion

concerned

2.7.1

(MOO,

To

codes

MOO.

M01:

M02: M30:

These

control. and

ted.

function

maximum

(MOO

for

builder's

except

the

FOR

M30)

control

stop

M99)

to

several

for

control.

STOP

and

the

codes,

M

decoded

FUNCTIONS

is

specified

3

digits.

is

M

manual

the

machine,

advance

M

signals

The

determined

codes.

for

the

following

the

reading

2-digit

are

with

function

Refer

func¬

M

following

BCD

output¬

the

by

to

codes

of

code

the

M

M90

M91

Note:

is

code

However,

M91

During

command,

signal

tion

is

it

the

to

P.

•

M90

With

tion

2.7.4

(1)

code

power

When

changed

is

it

•

P-

the

whenever

received,

is

interrupted

stopped

program

;

command,

this

is

cancelled.

BUFFERINC

following

The

buffering

Program

to

not

;

time

after

whose

function.

interrupt

applied,

is

M

the

changed

from

this

program

a

the

(if

the

deceleration)

number

the

FUNCTION

codes

M

Meaning

the

marked

code

by

command

program

machine

program

are

function

current

RESET

interruption

under

,

and

is

specified

interrupt

(M93,

issued

OFF

ON

with*ÿ.

operation.

an

to

execu¬

in

is

jumped

M92)

for

M

M90

motion,

by

func¬

+

2.7.2

(M90

M90

Even

output

M90

M91

M

CODES

Ml

TO

through

when

signal

7;

Program

09)

M109

they

are

(BCD

FOR

INTERNAL

are

for

programmed,

and

interrupt

internal

decoded

off

on

PROCESSING

processing.

no

external

sent.

output)

is

Note:

is

code

However,

M

code

M92

M93

When

changed

it

power

not

is

is the

to

changed

Meaning

1-block

4-block

applied,

code

M

buffering

the

marked

RESET

by

current

with"ÿ

operation.

M

.

19

2.7.4

(CONT'D)

(2)

BUFFERING

4-block

When

enters

remains

ly.

are

tion.

time

longer

of

between

function

streak

stop

(3)

block

1-

When

buffering

NOTE.

for

with

containing

result,

the

EXAMPLE

N51

52

N

53

N

54

N

M58

2.7.5

(M94,

With

this

offset

tool

error

data

instrument

function,

this

system

(1)

For

used

M

M94

M95

These

M93

the

In

this

read

With

for

than

subsequent

the

on

between

buffering

M92

While

the

move

M93

G01

•

X-

M92

REMOTE

95)

M

+

function,

No.

obtained

and

be

can

this

.

code

are

buffering

;

command

4-block

until

M92

mode,

in

advance

programs

the

4

the

blocks

is

effective

the

blocks.

command

mode

the

function,

M93

commands

to

6

up

;

U---

.

z.

•

;

TOOL

can

fed

an

automatic

formed.

function,

X-axis

cation

Z-axis

cation

non-modal

FUNCTION

(M93)

buffering

is

commanded

up

for

m

blocks

workpiece

tool

F---

be

reading

4

blocks,

can

be

in

(M92)

is

cancelled,

is

restored.

is

radius

blocks

Start

reading

Cancelling

reading

OFFSET

contents

the

modified

by

an

back

the

Meaning

remote

read

to

M

(M93,

is

given,

mode,

4

to

blocks

subsequent

which

in

advance

and

processing

interruption

eliminated.

avoiding

caused

given,

the

and

being

is

two

to

up

are

permitted,

may

be

of

4-block

.

between

Stop

tool

for

pensation

calculation

avoided.

4-block

.

MODIFICATION

of

by

external

the

control.

wear

tool

following

offset

tool

offset

codes.

M92)

the

control

which

subsequent¬

of

data

opera¬

the

operation

This

a

shiny

by

feed

4-block

the

compensated

blocks

read

in

advance

radius

or

other

can

advance

specified

a

the

machining

measuring

compensation

M

codes

modifi¬

is

time

block

1

not

and advance.

blocks

com¬

be

With

are

as

(2)

Compensation

M94

With

data

signed

axis

No.

X-axis

(3)

Compensation

M95

With

performed

(4)

At

signal

data

to

Metric

Inch

(5)

This

of

details,

manual.

2.7.6

RADIUS

These

provided

option

(1)

The

M

M96

M97

Note:

is

changed

However,

•

U

command,

this

request

signal

3-digit

offset

,

Z

this

value

and

makes

tool

offset

—

command,

as

time,

this

the

(DIX)"

is

data

Range

of

multiplied

stored

of

modification

Command

input

0

*0.

-

±0.0999

-

function

the

formed

refer

CIRCULAR

PATH

COMPENSATION

with

are

the

M

codes

.

following

code

Tool

path

Tool

path

point)

it

power

to

is

the

M

not

When

X-axis

in

the

to

data,

BCD

of

the

sum

value.

in

Z-axis

the

above

if

differs

"input

the

by

in

remote

10

off

999

with

control

10

Tool

times

mm

in.

in

compensation

to

the

machine

MODE

(M97,

effective

nose

tool

codes

M

Meaning

(Execution

is

applied,

code

compensation

marked

radius

on

radius

off

changed

control

outside,

the

adds

specified

value

same

Z

axis.

command

is

before

Offset

tool

offset

data

Command

0

-

0

-

detail

system.

ON/OFF

M96)

when

radius

are

used.

of

the

by

RESET

outputs

receives

it

to

the

tool

as

the

operation

x

10

on,

the

being

Memory.

10

on

input

with

mm

the

builder's

ON

*9.990

*0.9990

tool

+

the

control

compensation

circular

intersection

current

with"ÿ

.

operation.

a

offset

new

is

input

added

times

in

type

For

TOOL

M

X-

is

code

20

(2)

a.

b.

With

to

G41

tool

of

contour

gents

two

categories.

M96

mode

center

The

circular

a

contour

M97

mode

center

The

along

lines distance

the

G44,

radius)

lines

larger

line.

the

shifted

tool

arc

of

locus

equal

radius

the

than

of

from

\

locus

for

with

the

around

the

that

to

the

.CIKUUUt

AXC

compensation

of

the

commanded

the

angle

180°

is

tool

nose

the

nose

tool

formed

is

contour

the

tool

workpiece

between

in

the

radius

perimeter

radius

by

line

radius.

mode

(center

tan¬

following

describes

in

moves

straight

by

OTfMICTIM

V

%

the

by

(2)

•

.

•

(3)

subroutine

of

Call

P---

M98

With

this

starting

part

the

specified

times.

However,

omitted:

is

P

subroutine

Q

omitted:

is

in

No.

Q

subroutine

of

is

the

.

omitted:

end

called

L

Subroutine

4

times.

of

End

Q---

command,

a

with

program

by

P

when

program

the

main

program

programs

subroutine

program

L-*-

the

sequence

with

called

is

following

program

starting

No.

execution

program

;

subroutine

No.

program

the

and

specified

is

can

be

(M98)

following

is

executed

the

is

called.

at

only

nested

(G99)

program

No.

sequence

the

leading

by

once.

up

Q

in

L

P

is

to

(3)

a.

b.

2.7.7

With

have called

(1)

M96

(circular

Commands

the

from

blocks

G01

(G01)

G01

M96

(G01)

this

been

The

function

.

X---

•

X-

X---

(or

M97)

•

X-

SOUBROUTINE

function,

numbered

and

executed

following

.

mode

of

edge

•

arc)

Fig.

M96

in

Z--

Z-

•

(or

Z---

;

•

Z-

subroutine

as

M

2.8

M97

and

following

the

F---

M96

M97)

and

;

F---

;

PROCRAM

stored

many

codes

M97

of

become

;

}

programs

times

are

mode

intersection)

command

the

From

around

this

in

the

From

around

in

this

(M98,

advance

in

desired.

as

for

used

(calculation

effective

move

the

edge

block.

move

the

edge

block.

M99)

which

are

this

(4)

;

M99

program

When

this

turns

block

main

called

was

routine

P--

M99

this

When

routine

sequence

the

program.

Simple

P

M99

this

When

gram,

sequence

program.

simply

program.

is

written

to

code

to

the

program.

is

program,

jump

a

•

command

operation

the

No.

jumps

end

it.

is

block

which

in

after

;

written

No.

command

;

specified

Q

is

If

to

N

1

2

N

the

at

written,

immediately

the

execution

the

at

the

specified

is

simply

omitted,

leading

the

G50

X0

GOO

end

the

subroutine

end

the

operation

by

in

used

jumps

Q

by

the

Z0

.

;

subroutine

of

operation

following

of

returns

P

the

in

program

end

program

the

a

in

main

to

the

of

sub¬

the

main

re¬

the

to

main

pro¬

main

M

M98 M99

code

Call

End

of

subroutine

of

subroutine

Meaning

program program

Writing

program

this

make

multi

endless

N9

M99

blocks and

operation.

;

(10

executing

lines

maximum)

cycle

of

start

21

2.7.7

(CONT'D)

NOT

1.

2.

SOUBROUTINE

.

Es

When

and

P

not

While

under

is

repititions

refer

3.

This

programs

memory.

through

4.

When

than

EXAMPLE

Mam

oioo

T

N1

GOO

M98

N2

N3

M

M9fi

-

N5

-

1)

7.8

OTHER

How

ubo\e the

2.

(

lie

t

program

sequence

the

,

lound

—

P200

....

alarm

command

execution,

can

3.

4.

to

function

are

Main

NC

subroutine

times,

4

Program

-

--

•

;

L2

03

;

.

M

use

to

depends

machine

2.

can

stored

tapes

alarm

-

;

CODES

the

tool

PROGRAM

No.

code

for

L

the

be

displayed.

2.

be

programs

or

programs

code

J/

'

other

upon

builder's

specified

041

is

the

number

remaining

used

when

in

the

part

can

the

part

are

"042"

Subroutine

I

\-X-J

’

T

One

codes

M

the

machine.

manual.

(M98,

by

displayed.

of

For

subroutine

program

be

commanded

program

nested

is

i

\

«

Two

times

time

other

M99)

address

Q

by

are

repetitions

number

details

memory.

more

displayed.

Program

;

0200

N1

N2

N3

:

N20M99

than

Refer

(2)

(3)

When

same

construction.

will,

are

these

block

depend

executed

completion

these

For

M

puts

M

with

of

M-code

2-digit

codes

on

simultaneously

move

the

machine

(Whether

command.)

commands,

BCD

are

commanded

command

codes.

the

,

tool

M

commands

with

the

in

execution

design

or

after

control

the

and

out¬

of

2.7.9

When

BCD

codes

(1)

(2)

M

the

output

between

M

codes

M110

codes.

M90

codes,

M

put.

3-D1CIT

control

option,

MOO

between

and

M999

through

and

See

is

2.7.2

OUTPUT1"

BCD

provided

it

can

and

M999.

MOO

are

output

are

M109

no

BCD

M

CODES

with

command

M89,

and

in

internal

for

code

FOR

the

M

3-digit

and

3-digit

processing

them

INTERNAL

3-digit

between

BCD

is

out¬

PROCESSING.

(3)

With

output

2.7.1

See

(4)

;

The

depends

machine

PREPARATORY

2.8

MOO,

in

specific

on

tool

M01,

addition

M

CODES

usages

machine

builder's

M30,

and

to

the

FOR

of

the

tool

design.

manual.

FUNCTIONS

decode

BCD

STOP.

M

signals

output.

3-digit

Refer

are

codes

to

(G-FUNCTION)

the

to

2.8.1

Address

of

ing

their

groups.

LIST

G

the

OF

,

plus

block.

C

up

CODES

to

Table

3

digits

2.8.1

specify

gives

G

the

codes

mean¬

and

22

M

code

M0

M04

M05

M08

M0

3

9

i

able

Meaning

Spindle

running

Spindle

running

Spindle

Coolant

2

M

off

7

Typical

Codes

forward

reverse

stop

on

for

Example

Machine

Direct

from

cannot

M05

inserted

them

Remarks

switching

M03

be

must

.

of

M04

to

done

be

between

(

1)

G

codes

following

are

two

broadly

types.

classified

into

the

Meaning

in

When

Table

G-code G-code

commanded.

G-code

commanded

groups

switch,

Modal

.

G-code

Non-modal

G-code

(2)

G

codes

modal.

the

power

in

Y

the

2.8.1

effective

of

the

effective

block.

from

control

the

G

are

automatically

same

01

is

codes

until

group

only

through

energized

marked

the

in

other is

the

are

11

with

selected.

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

2.8.2

2.

(1)

(2)

G

codes

non-modal.

together

block.

The

ly

in

codes

G

Class

G

codes

design.

manual.

Standard

cial

basic

set

is

special

to

When

porated

eter

special

to

0

ard

POSITIONING

2.1

8.

GOO

This

rate

system

away

each

For

upon

builder's

EXAMPLE

of

group

*

They

with

the

modalGcodes

block.

a

Class

in

are

O

G

#600

will

G

is

See

codes

feature,

1,

to

the

m

5D

G

reconvert

codes

options.

determined

the

codes

G

by

1

standard

code

G

special

the

to

7

codes

.

Positioning

X(U)---

command

to

the

point

set

by

W)

(U,

by

independently.

axis

the

rapid

the

traverse

machine,

manual.

in

should

other

can

are

B

machine

can

parameters.

and,

1.

code

G

control,

will

1

.

II

the

(COO,

(GOO)

Z(W)-.-

moves

(X,

the

G50

from

refer

the

G

be

basic,

The

by

be

when

codes

G

the

convert

Setting

G

C06)

tool

a

Z)

command

the

rate,

Table

be

not

codes

commanded

and

of

use

machine

the

tool

builder's

coverted

This

parameter

are

H

option

setting

G

the

codes

;

rapid

at

in

to

the

present

as

the

coordinate

2.8.1

are

commanded

in

one

raixed-

those

optional

tool

to

spe¬

is

a

#6005D7

converted

incor¬

is

param¬

of

codes

parameter

to

or

it

machine

to

stand¬

the

traverse

moves

point

depends

in

for

tool

(3)

Along

chine

independently

tool

when

be

and

(4)

GOO

When

until

commanded

(5)

)

(

6

a.

b.

the

slide

locus

working

taken

the

a

is

it

other

the

For

tribution

DETECT

advances

activation

completion

the

this

When

workpiece

rounding

NOTES

ERROR

The

decrease

missible

move

for

T

When

in

put

designation

for

offset

tool

specified

axes

moves

of

not

may

out

avoid

to

workpiece.

modal

is

C

commanded,

codes

G

.

positioning

started

is

state

the

to

the

of

code

G

edges

avoided.

is

DETECT

the

of

after

level

command.

is

code

T-code

the

motion

rapid

in

other.

each

be

a

program,

the

fouling

code

in

with

only

turned

block

the

of

used,

is

machined

are

servo

the

commanded,

block.

tool

of

using

by

straight

between

the

in

remains

it

the

GOO,

after

on,

DETECT

pulse

state

ON

lag

pulse

traverse

T

01

pulses

the

resultant

line,

care

the

group.

effective

the

upon

rates,

are

pulse

ERROR

traverse

The

01

group

the

and

only

state

distribution.

therefore,

true,

means

to

distribution

should

GOO

required

is

GOO

rate

code.

ma¬

and

must

tool

dis¬

program

the

after

the

and

the

per¬

the

be

for

COO,

EXAMPLE

it

(7)

G50

G00

150.

X

T0101

•

S1000

G00

•

Z100.

rate

@

(GOO)

X30.

Z5.

;

M03

designation

for

;

tool

•

;••

offset

GOO

in

•

traverse

of

motion

can

be

positioning.

omitted

X-Axis:

Z-Axis:

+x

12

m/min

m/mm

6

+x

W

P

J

r

z

/

2

/

30

D1A

X

.1

5.

23

2.8

PREPARATORY

(CONT'D)

G

Code

GOO

G01

G02

G03

C04

G06 CIO

Gil

12

G

G20

G21

G22 G23 G27

G

28

G29

C

30

G31

G

32

C

34

G

35

G

36

37

G

38

G

C

39

G40

G

4

42

G

43

G44

1

:

Special

Code

G

coo

G01

G02

G03

G04 G06

G

10

Gil

G

12

G20

G21

22

G

G23

G27 G28

29

G

30

G

31

G

33

G

34

C

35

G

36

G

37

G

38

G

39

rG40

4

C

G42

G

43

44

G

FUNCTIONS

Special

I

Code

G

GOO

;

G01

G02

G03

C04

G06

G

G?0

G71

G

G23 G27

G28

G29

G

G G

G

r

G40

1

G G

G43

G

10

11

12

22

30

31

33

34

35 36

37

38

39

4

42

44

(C-FUNCTION)

Group

H

01

05

01

07

08

1

06

Table

Positioning

Linear

interpolation

Circular Circular

Dwell

*

ERROR

Tool

Beveling

Rounding

Inch

Metric

Radius Radius

Reference

Automatic

*

Return

Skip

Threadcutting,

threadcutting

Variable

Tool

Stored

Tool Tool Tool

Tool

2.8

List

interpolation,

interpolation

DETECT

offset

specification

input

programming

point

return

from

2nd

to

function

lead

set

error

stroke stroke

stroke

radius

of

G

(rapid

value

traverse

OFF

setup

specification

return

to

reference

continuous

threadcutting

compensation

limit

limit limit

compensation

compensation compensation

Codes

Function

angle

CW,

CCW,

positioning

for

check

reference

point

2nd

area

2nd

area

3rd

area

feed)

programming

(radius

circular

point

threadcutting,

ON

OFF

area

ON OFF

cancel

No.

No

No.

R

Cornering

interpolation

point

1

2

3

4

for

linear

designation)

R

designation)

multi-start

CW

CCW

13

O.

Basic

Optional

Section

B

B,

O

B,

O

B,

O

B B

O

O O

O

B

O

B,

O

O O

O

O O O

2U

shows

powered

is

NOTES

].

G

roup

The

power

01

04

03

theGcodes

or

reset

following

is

applied

selected

codes

G

can

G

code

GOOorG01

G

or

G

98

90

C

99

or

91

G

be

for

set

when

initial

by

control

the

state

parameters

Parameter

#6005D

#600501

#6005D0

when

2

2.

3.

4

5

When

of

01

current

Radius

can

be

G23

respectively.

Cornering

Gil

of

Initial

when

their

D2>

the

control

group

one

programming

made

and

stales

power

respective

should

can

G12.

is

by

of

be

C

applied

reset,

is

be

set

be

for

G02

and

programmed

Refer

codes

setting

GOO

by

circular

G03

to

of

are

data

whether

or

kept

parameter

interpolation

instead

by

2

8.7

06.

08.

determined

(#6001D(),

G

code

as

the

#6005D(,

of

G22

G01

instead

Cornering.

09

groups

by

D;.

C

Code

SO

G

G51

Special

Code

C

G92

G51

I

Special

G

Code

G92

G51

Table

H

Group

2.8

List

Coordinate

Maximum

system

Return

of

spindle

setup

of

G

system

_

current

Codes

setup

revolution

display

(Cont’d)

Function

setup,

value

B

Basic

Optional

O

_

Suction

U

O

»

i

coordinate

work

to

origin

r

V

r

f

G65

G66

C67

G68

70

G

71

G

72

G

73

G

G74

75

G

G76

G90

G

92

G

94

G96

G97

G98 C99

G65

G66

P

G67 G68

f

G

69

G70

G71

G72

G73

74

G

G75

G

76

G77

G

78

G79

G96

G97 G94

G95

G65

G66

r"c67

G68

V

G69

G72

G73 G74

G75

G?6

77

G

78

G20

21

G

G24

G96

G97

G

94

G95

09

10

01

02

*

04

User

macro

User

macro

User

macro

Mirror

Finishing

Stock

Pattern

Peck

Grooving

Automatic

Turning

Threading

Facing

Constant

per

Feed

per

image

cycle

removal

repeating

drilling

in

cycle

surface

minute

revolution

call

simple

modal

call call

modal

by

programming

by

programming

in

turning

in

facing

in

Z-axis

X-axis

threadcuttmg

A

cycle

B

speed

(mm

cancel

/mm)

(mm

cycle

control

/rev)

ON

OFF

Multiple

repetitive

cycles

cancel

O

O O

O

O O

O

B

O

B

G

1

Cl

Gill

G

112

V

is

powered

NOTES*

1.

Group

22

23

shows

The

power

01

04

lU

G90

G

91

22

Cl

G123

Gill

G

112

G

the

or

reset

following

is

applied

90

G

G91

G122

123

G

Gill

1

G

12

codes

selected

G

codes

can

C

code

COOorG01

or

C°°

1

v'

?

i

O'

*.

be

•M

for

set

03

11

*

initial

when

by

Absolute Incremental

Tool

registration

Tool

registration

Taper

multiple

Arc

multiple

the

control

when

stale

parameters.

Parameter

froOOSD

#o00=>Dl

*0

command

>

command

start

end

beveling

2.

3.

4

5.

/rounding

When

of

01

current

Radius

be

can

G23,

Cornering

Gil

of

Initial

when

tKen

DM

Tool

control

the

should

group

can

one

programming

by

made

respectively.

can

G12.

and

of

states

is

power

rer-peeme

life

reset,

is

be

set

be

G02

be

programmed

Refer

codes

G

applied

setting

control

GOO

for

and

by

circular

G03

to

of

are

dat

whether

or

kept

parameter

interpolation

instead

by

2

8.7

08,

06,

determined

*60

l

B

O

O O

G

code

as

the

#6005Dÿ

ol

instead

G01

Cornering.

groups

09

by

ID')

J

G22

D'

25

8.

2.

(

C

r

i

a

2

2.

}

06

COo

Willi

is

lolloping

.

G06

It

EXAMPLE

GOO

G06

ERROR

Ml)-'

this

identic.-!]

is

a

is

effective

X---

X-

•••

X

DETECT

ZlU

command

to

that

aspects.

non-raodal

only

•

Z-

•

Z---

•

z-

OFF

Positioning

)

•••

.

the

positioning

GOO

of

G

code

in

theprogrammed

except

m

Move

the

process

lor

group.

*

by

tlie

G06

GOO

block.

©

EXAMPLE

50

G

X100.

GOO

T0202

X35.

G01

Z0

X60.

FI.

ZbO.

SfaOO

Z5.

F0.2

;

M03

;

+\

/

_

Executed

linear

polation

£

/

by

inter¬

G01.

b.

NOTE

(b\!Z)

ha\e

GOo

2.8.3

-

G

A

line

code

moved

F

taining

not.

nated

rate

With

pulse

on

for

ERROR

advances

tion

this

to

no

01

tool

at

or

.

the

distribution

the

of

reason

the

The

are

effective

influence

LINEAR

X(U)

moved

is

the

in

a\

E

code

the

it

causes

the

by

i-X

positioning

completion

preceding

the

pulse

,

wrokpiece

of

DETECT

check,

DETECT

to

the

extent

ERROR

only

on

the

INTERPOLATION

Z(W)

to

(U,

or

a

or

•••

the

be

in

format

E

rate

W)

code

•

traverse

coordinate

by

must

G01

F

POSITION PROGRAMMED

Z

/

G06,

of

is

immediately

the

of

block,

and

block

distribution

edges

lag

ON

for

cutting

motion

F(E)

point

designated

system

from

specified

the

is

W

pulse

after

pulses.

under

•

(X,

set

the

in

the

distribution

making

the

after

process.

are

/OFF

feeds,

(C01)T

•

;

Z)

on

by

present

the

block.

Feedrate

tangential

positioning

started

an

program

the

comple¬

rounded

signals

and

GOO

and

a

straight

the

by

G50

point.

block

desig¬

For

F

con¬

If

feed-

or

<2V

fco

35

DIA

&

•

Angle

With

linear

specified

G01

or

G01

With

E

will

the

either

rate

by

specifiable

be

+

the

Metric

Inch

programming

the

control

interpolation

angles.

X(U)---

(

W)

•

Z

these

commands,

executed

direction

X-

in

the

F

or

with

Input

•

or

tangential

E

equipped

•

A-

A---

by

of

the

Z-axis

code.

address

Programmable

for

linear

with

can

be

F(E)

•

F(E)

•

linear

a

specifying

Z-axis

direction.

direction

The

range

A

of

0

-

interpolation

this

commanded

;

•

;

•

interpolation

angle

distance

and

is

of

as

follows.

is

range

angle

A

*360.000°

option,

(a)

(b)

The

specified

angle

A

T

at

m

feed-

26

E

u

2

PRESENT

TOOL

POSIJtpN

Sign

Table

2.9

Meaning

Table

2.10

Meaning*

0 0

A

A-

+

+X

Angle

clockwise

axis.

Angle

from

U/2

EXAMPLE

G01

X50.

Z0.

G01

X

+

counterclock-

from

clockwise

+Z-axis.

,A+

\

START

roller

+

A

150.

180.

A-

,

+Z-

F0.3

Z

+

\

-+Z

A+

mun

Z

;

routi

G02

C03

X(U)

Z(W)

I

K

Circular

clockwise

Circular

counterclockwise

End

axis

End

on

Distance

of

X-axis

Distance

of

Z-axis

+X

point

(Diameter

point

Z-axis

arc

END

POINT

interpolation.

interpolation,

of

from

to

arc

(Radius

from

to

arc-center

_

13

arc

value)

arc

start

center

start

on

value)

X-

point

on

point

on

CENTER

JL

+x

Ocn

O

EKt)

X

+

CIKTUÿL-V

£

2

t

z

POINT

K

+z

5TART

+

POINT

Z

&

2.8.4

G02(G03)

•

toolismoved

A

is

ter

The

dinate

present

A

tool

verse

•

The

shown

are

d

DIA

50

CIRCULAR

X(U)---

away

from

end

point

system

position

moves

rate

specified

meanings

below

START

(T

POINT

60.

INTERPOLATION

Z(W).--

circular

the

on

present

the

is

the

by

G02,

,

(U,

a

by

arc

G50

W)

circular

the

G03

of

set

along

of

or

and

I-

position

(X,

away

or

F

A=

•

arc

Z)

arc

E

each

150*

+

(C02,

K---

whose

in

from

at

code.

address

by

the

+

the

Z

C03)

F(E)

cen¬

(I,

coor¬

tra¬

K)

• •

.

Circular

rant

;

interpolation

can

be

EXAMPLE

Fig.

programmed

>

I

60.

DIA

of

MR

2.9

an

in

multiquad¬

on

arc

a

single

K

\

i

\

block.

+x

A

100

DIA

27

2.8.4

(CONT'D)

Arc

coordinate

The

G01

CIRCULAR

center

I

K

above

case

Z--

INTERPOLATION

F

Table

100

-

=

•••

V

can

2B2

-19.

(10000,

-

2

596-—

be

2.11

60

-

-2700)

20

mm

-

E

202

programmed

-19

-384

60

mm

IGQ2,

as

G03)

follows.

Note

tn.it

shaded

tool

The

area,

will

end

commanded

applied

the

is

digit

tions

3.

to

tool

recommendable

of

least

over

When

Programming

dius instead

11

tho

continue

point

when

the

not

may

1/2

the

value

of

etui

the

alarm

to

coordinate

the

nose

tool

move

to

input

as

one

control

for

can

be

G22,

pomi

is

move

circular

radius

properly.

calculate

increment

and

is

provided

Circular

commanded

G23.

ir>

not

displayed

endlessly.

should

interpolation

compensation,

up

and

disregard

Interpolation,

iti-vl

be

preciselv

Generally,

to

the

count

the

with

G02,

by

m

and

rest.

the

is

or

it

Radius

ra¬

G03

G02

•

The

tangential

NOTES:

The

1.

is

"When

in

moves

the

Therefore,

plane

inversely.

When

2.

on

the

is

point

X60

feedrate

direction

defined

viewing

the

right-hand

clockwise

.

arc

(-X.Z

the

circumference

the

alarm

follows.

as

of

.

Z-46.6

commanded

feedrate.

as

"

the

plane)

-

\

I

end

not

is

.

arc

of

the

follows.

the

coordinate

from

direction

o o

point

displayed

The

120.

arc

X.Z

Fig.

C

of

mark

K-19.6

by

of

plane

beginning

the

of

2.21

(,

02

Ui

arc

specified

o

the

F

G02

in

system,

rotation

is

not

is

and

indicates

F---

code

for

Clockwise

-Y

direction

presented

designated

by

the

tool

the

is

the

point

in

the

a

tool

the

radius,

path

end

of

EXAMPLE

G03

a.

G03

b.

X80.0

U40.0

40.00

JO.

40.00

30.00

00

END

POIKT

Z15.0

END

POINT

C

*5-00

W-40

-tNTCK

is!»

CCO

ENTER

r

0

-40

r

1-10.0

-30.00

I-

00

-JO

00

START

POINT

-io.

S&.00

10.

T-10.00

a.

oo

K-30.0

a

0

K-30.0

30.00

F150

;

28

1

M

ARC

CENTE1

2.8.5

A

(1)

(2)

DWELL

04

G

This

of

time

Dwell

(G04)

U(P)---

command

designated

is

programmed

;

interrupts

by

the

as

feed

address

independent

an

for

the

U

lengtl

or

P.

block.

0

(3)

The

designated

Dwell

Dwell increment.

EXAMPLE:

G04

NOTES:

G04

1.

2.

The

the

DETECT

move

Therefore,

advances

after

state

maximum

time:

time

U3.

P3500

is

non-modal

a

counting

instant

ON

command

detecting

.

5

to

with

is

•••

the

state

with

the

length

0.001

not

of

dwell

control

block

G04

of

address

9999.99

to

influenced

3.

5-second

3.

5-second

G

code.

time

enters

upon

before

U0

block

ERROR

time

which

U

or

seconds

by

dwell

is

started

the

completion

G04.

the

immediately

DETECT

is

P

input

control

can

as

follows.

/output

from

ERROR

of

the

ON

be

P

For

X

For

the

Z

For

U

original

W

For

R

specified

offset

The

programmed

EXAMPLE

G10

specifying

changing

specified

adding

changing

P16

Table

tool

values

are

X32.5

the

offset

value.

not

2.12

Meaning

tool

the

value.

specified

tool

the

which

for

changed.

WO.

05

offset

values.

radius

;

No.

value

no

value

to

the

address

to

the

is

EXAMPLE

GO

G04

G01

With

is

2.8.6

With

and

set

(1)

W-l.

1

U0.2

W-l.

the

obtained.

TOOL

G10

corrected.

G10

F25

;

above

•»\

0.2

OFFSET

command,

P...

;

program,

DWELL

tool

X(U)---

—

1

MM

VALUE

mm

1

0.2

1

mm

—

chip

(C10)

offset

Z(W)---

feed

second

feed

cutting

values

+

R---

dwell

can

feed

be

time

(2)

The

value Offset

The

above

tapes,

Memory

tape

Label

%

G10

do

G10

%

*—

Contents

changed

is

format

and

format

;

P

—

•••

P

•"

P

z

X-axis

of

is

to

once.

at

is

•••

X

•••

X

0.05

Z-axis

value

tool

used

store

follows.

as

Z

—

Z

is

mm

value

set

is

offset

R

No.

make

to

values

the

;

—

•••

;

R

•••

;

R

added

to

offset

16

to

32.5

in

m

With

set

this

or

command,

corrected

offset

tool

in

part

programs.

values

are

29

2.8.7

CORNERING

(Cll,

C12)

X

(1)

Beveling

G

11

Gil

+x

(Gil)

X(U)--.

Z(W)---

X(U)---

END

POINTÿ

K-.-

Beveling

K-

w..

45'

Z

+

for

K--

K+

START

POINT

(E

)

F

•• •

X-axis

F(E)

U

X

2

(DIAMETER)

command

This

workpiece.

specified

of

Table

Meaning

2.

13

Beveling

•

Gil

1+

Z(W)...

END

POINT

removes

Addresses

simultaneously

each

address

for

Z-axis

F

•

I

45*

oSTART

(E)

the

sharp

and

X

in

is

.

POINT

Z

a

block.

shown

corner

cannot

below.

of

be

I-

T

Z

w

Beveling

the

following

K

|

I

The

command

format

(T)

D

K

I

L10

values

<

|U/2j

error.

GOO

Gil

(Gil)

7

D1A

-

d

n

(K

values.

exceeding

X30.

Z-20.

X80

«*x

20

Beveling

and

I

(

.

,

ZO

18.

K-7.

I)

|<|

the

F30

;

Value

Direction

are

limited

W

|

above

;

value

within

causes

I

(2)

This

corner.

ified

is

formed

each

Rounding

G

Beveling

(Radius

Beveling

(G12)

X(U)---

12

Z(W)-

command

performs

Addresses

simultaneously

as

a

quarter-round.

address

is

•

shown

X

in

K---

•

I

Value

Value)

Direction

•

the

and

Z

a

block.

below.

(E)

F

rounding

cannot

The

Meaning

•

be

of

the

spec¬

corner

of

30

8-

T\«

50

DIA

Fig.

2.10

Table

2.14

G

12

+X

K

Rounding

the

following

|K|

The

command

causes

X(U)---

END

POINT

i

<

format

Rounding

K-

o—

+Z

values

values.

|u/2|

exceeding

error.

K---

K+

«r

START

Rounding

(K

and

for

X

F(E)

u

2

(DIAMETER)

POINT

I)

l|

|

the

axis

• •

•

X

value

direction

are

limited

<

|w|

above

value

within

Z(W)---

G12

END

POINT

Ik

-ur

Z

i

K

NOTES:

Gil

1.

They

the

2.

Gil

are

block,

Rounding

I

W

G12

and

remain

group

and

commanded

they

A

G12

constitute

Z

for

(E)

••

F

START

POINT

<

Rounding

are

modalGcodes

effective

are

commanded.

are

for

both

axis

one

.

•

value direction

until

axis

axes

format

a

;

other

m

only.

in

error.

the

G

the

A

codes

If

they

same

group.

in

(I

©

GOO

12

G

(G

12)

X20.

Z-25.

,70

ZO

19.

X70

3

«

D1A

TV

2D

K-6

D1A

EXAMPLE

W-

G12

;

30

F

;

F20

In

3.

I

and

can

4.

5.

6.

7.

manded,

assured

Tool

tive

In

of

ing

G01

fy

G01

GDI

+x

25

«

U/

$

+z

fy

be

G01

•

X-

the

G10

nor

K

be

commanded.

.

radius

to

the

finish

the

special

or

Gil

code

identical

X(U)-..

Z(W)-..

code

rounding.

instead

used

X(U)---

Z(W)--.

•

or

G

block

correct

compensation

blocks

form

canned

G12

can

be

beveling.

can

be

•K•

12

can

However,

modes,

whichIand

in

If

tool

containing

commands

be

used

K-.. I--.

used

I

of

and

R...

R---

•

no

block

suchablock

movement

function'1'

Gil

G70

+,

cycle

commanded.

instead

blocks

F(E)

instead

in

this

K.

F(E)

of

••

•

Error

can

•

without

K

are

not

is

or

through

Gil

;

G12

case,

•

"050’'

0

is

com¬

be

effec¬

G12.

contain¬

speci¬

to

speci¬

R

must

G73

31

2.8.8

(C20,

Unit

data

codes.

INCH/METRIC

)

21

G

of

measurement

is

selectively

G

code

DESIGNATION

(metric

specified

Input

by

or

inch)

the

unit

BY

CODE

C

of

input

following

opera¬

make

the

b.In

principle,

current

when

tion

nal)

is

used.

The

G

4.

ently

G20/G21

the

tool

in

offset

the

must

offset

G20

values

mode

be

values.

display

position

are

and

commanded

reset

display

processed

G21

the

after

(exter¬

differ¬

mode.

modifying

These

of

end

commanded,

are

motions

Subsequent

a.

"lool

b.

Part

c.

Part

d.

Displays

e.

NOTES:

When

1

ol

fore,

power

by

EXAMPLE

r

G20

G21

G

codes

block

a

changed.

are

offset

settings

of

manual

of

or

G20

inch/metric

the

state

application

parameter

ER

CR

01234

,

20

.G

-

are

of

the

part

values

G21

,

its

#6001DQ.

Inch Metric

programmed

own.

of

units

programs

parameters

and

movements

commanded,

is

selection

of

G20/G21

depends

Inch

If

input

these

all

is

input

at

the

G

the

changed.

the

at

on

the

input

leading

codes

following

the

setting

There¬

of

time

setting

designation

Stored

set

off¬

values

15000

2.8.9

RADIUS

INTERPOLATION

In

programming

control

the

coordinates.

the

addresses

(1)

In

requires

programming

automatically

tool

(I,

by

X(U)---

moves

is

dinates

nated

interpolation

G22

(G23)

A

center

position.

dinates

the

present

the

F

code.

meanings

shown

(2)

(3)

along

by

The

are

Designation

Processing

(Inch)

G20

1.5000

PROGRAMMING

(C22,

circular

Normally,

and

I

K)

the

G23)t

the

they

K.

G22

of

calculates

from

address

interpolation

data

.

Z(W)---

end

set

of

radius

R

arc

G22,

the

away

point

by

radius

The

(X,

circular

along

Z)

position

below.

of

in.

the

by

in

of

are

or

the

radius

and

R

circular

from

G50

(U,

at

G23

value

Processing

G21

FOR

the

given

G23,

arc

performs

R...

the

arc

of

or

is

W).

feedrate

and

R

(Metric)

15.000

mm

CIRCULAR

(G02,

arc-center

by

the

control

center

value

F(E)

arc

desig¬

whose

present

is

coor¬

at

away

Tool

designated

address

each

in

G03)

using

coor¬

circular

••

from

moves

,

2

a

b.

3

a.

32

G20/G21

When

program,

forehand

Cancel

used

Cancel

compensation

Take

mand

Program

before

work

.

tool

the

of

move

take

.

coordinate

position

(G41

following

G20/G21

absolute

command

selection

the

following

-

procedure

selection.

zero

offset,

G44)

point

(G50).

commanded

is

procedure

system

and

.

for

(G50T),

tool

after

all

radius

the

axes

in

be¬

com¬

is

R

sign

value

commanded

of

radius

R

when

and

than

>0,

180°

an

R

are

this

with

radius

than

value

a

case,

180°,

more

Radius

value

the

In

When

less

if

describing

incremental

by

programming.

arc,

describing

0,

an

<

specified.

arc

C22

C23

X(U)

Z(W)

R

Circular

radiu*

Circular

radius

The

X-coordinatc

of

the

(Diameter

The

Z-coordinate

of

the

Distance

of

arc

tal

value

interpolation

for

CW

interpolation

for

CCW

arc

value)

arc

from

arc

to

with

Table

the

center

sign)

of

the

of

the

start

(Incremen¬

2.15

Meaning

by

end

point

+x

+X

<)ÿ

o

O"

UD

X

POINT

rtAAT

FOUfT

NOTES:

G22

1.

until

In

2.

R

should

designated

When

3.

fixed,

circular

is

the

and

other

not

R

G23

G22

contained

not

is

varied

the

tool

arc.

codes

G

code

or

G23

be

commanded.

I

and

by

will

mode,

with

R*

are

of

01

R

or

K.

move

END

CENTER

t

modal.

group

the

is

both

along

POINT

i

R

They

is

block

designated

Radius

start

and

the

are

kept

commanded.

in

which

as

zero

cannot

end

points

following

be

0

180*

co

START

POINT

EXAMPLE

G01

X40.

(X40

G02

OR

VE

\/L

END

POINT

2

Z-10.

)

.

t

A

180*

w

Z-52.5

END

POINT

180*

BELOW

OR

ARC

CENT

F20

OR

"START

POINT

;

R30.

Fig.

(F20)

2.11

2.12

;

4.

5.

6.

2.8.10

(1)

Therefore,

ter

does

(Distance

<

R

nose

Tool

for

the

block

The

designated

special

the

When

gramming

radius

G03

instead

REFERENCE

X(U)---

G27

this

With

the

absolute

cremental

along

position

the

reference

no

command

are

ing

in

not

radius

block

in

canned

control

option,

(R)

programming

command,

coordinate

two

the

not

the

following

which

exist

between

compensation

containing

finishing

cycles

is

circular

G22,

of

POINT

(W)

Z

coordinate

axes

checked

is

point.

is

given,

executed.

START

POINT

case,

causes

point

start

2

G22

or

G22

shape

(G70

to

provided

interpolation

can

G23.

CHECK

;

•••

tool

the

point

(U,

simultaneously,

for

For

the

positioning

the

error.

data

end

and

is

effective

or

G23.

G23

can

commands

G73).

radius

with

made

be

(C27)

is

positioned

Z)

(X,

W)

by

and

conformance

for

axis

and

arc

be

by

or

moving

which

check¬

cen¬

point)

of

pro¬

G02,

to

in¬

then,

with

END

POINT

ARC

CENTER

+x

R

R30.

/

''

<D

52.5

m

10.

&

40.

DIA

6--

START

w

—

POINT

Fig.

/

2.13

REFERENCE

£

¥

POINT

A

33

2.8.10

(CONT'D)

(2)

REFERENCE

the

If

return-to-reference

tion

directions

continued

is

the this

and

(Cycle

NOTES.

1.

The

machine

motion

the

reference

erence

Automatic

2.

If

G

mode,

set

displaced

tool

the

at

G27,

EXAMPLE

a.

Cancelling

ceding

C

b.

Cancelling

G27

3.

The

motion

return

G69

off).

2.8.11

POINT

AUTOMATIC

(C

position

the

is

reference

constitutes

the

automatic

start

reference

tool

point

27

commanded

is

offset

reference

cancel

T

27

U-.-

U-

mirror

commanded

position

mode

28)

is

reference

specified,

further.

point

the

lamp

point

to

which

under

return

point

return

Reference

tool

the

from

value.

the

tool

G27.

00

W---

m

.

W.

image

error,

(Opposite

POINT

the

reference

lamp

point

the

even

ret

operation

goes

is

the

control

function.

Point

in

returns

reference

Positioning

point.

offset

;

the

block

.

T

function

by

G27.

tool

RETURN

CHECK

lights.

in

automatic

the

If

along

urn

-position-error

off.)

an

fixed

tool

G28

or

Return.

the

tool

to

Before

mode.

in

the

containing

IHOO

is

To

command

post

TO

(G27)

point,

The

axial

the

all

operation

position

one

axis,

is

interrupted.

on

point

can

return

of

the

automatic

6.2.1

See

position

the

position

by

point

cannot

be

commanding

block

pre¬

G27.

;

effective

G27

the

m

image

avoid

mirror

REFERENCE

the

posi¬

is

the

with

the

not

,

the

by

ref¬

off¬

made

the

The

which

(2)

When

pleted,

returned

to

automatic

(3)

The

motions

application,

reference

low-speed

RAPID

SPEED

Thereafter,

POINT

command

the

+

tool

the

series

TRAVERSE

SPEED

motion

RAFIS

X

START

POINT

the

REDUCTION

INTERIM

POSITIONING

14

Fig.

not

does

instruction

return

Reference

axis

lights.

reference

operation

RETURN

of

are

as

the

point

mode

APPROACH

UNIT

Fig.

RETURN

the

rapid

is

in

GOO.

of

TRAVERSE

POSITIONING

\

¥

2.14

move

omitted.

is

reference

to

Point

When

in

point

is

resumed.

follows.

return

as

are

shown

as

SPEED

APPROACH

SV

REFERENCE

POINT

2.15

TO

traverse

POINT

V

REFERENCE

•

POINT

\

'

RETURN

TO

X

J

the

along

motion

Return

both

TO

With

motions

shown

1

DISTANCE

REFERENCE

lamp

the

axes,

REFERENCE

initial

below

below.

SPEED

SEQUENCE

SPEED

as

REFERENCE

+z

for

axis

com¬

is

for

returns

tool

the

power

to

the

in

BY

SET

1

PARAMETER

2

J

under

the

34

(1)

X(U)

G28

this

to

passing

words,

command,

the

absolute

With

back

after

other

manded

incremental

or

simultaneously

automatically

reference

the

by

The

specified

known

or

as

"INTERIM

• •

z

(W)

reference

through

tool

the

coordinate

position

along

returns

point

’’INTERIM

POINT.”

;

•

tool

an

(U,

the

return

Z)

interim

two

can

automatically

position

W)

axes,

reference

function.

(U,

or

the

point

positions

the

to

(X,

POSITIONING

be

to

by

brought

point.

the

(X,

moving

and

W)

POINT,"

com¬

then

point

is

In

Z)

(4)

However,

by

fied

same

low

obtained

Fig.

when

parameter

motion

.

2,

16

traverse

low

#6010D5

speed

as

SPEED

set

in

speed

to

the

SEQUENCE

is

1,

the

1st

time

speci¬

is

NOTES:

For

1.

the

in

turn

2.

The

ENCE

shown be

3.

Before

the

a.

b.

4.

When

offset

celled.

2.8.12

(1)

With

a

it

zero

REFERENCE

parameter

low

traverse

2.8.11.2,

Fig.

to

Reference

starting

POINT

in

started

RETURN

DIRECTION

REFERENCE

m

writing

tool

position

Cancelling

G28

Cancelling

G28

or

RETURN

this

specified

been

has

point

setting

speed

refer

point

motion

Fig.

2.8.11.4.

any

from

fgiBSoN

G28

offset

in

the

T

is

written

radius

FROM

function,

point

once

by

ZERO

Z-.

in

Z...

the

returned

X---

X...

tool

compensation

and

other

return

to

6.2.1

Point.

for

RETURN

must

be

Fig.

position.

*

r

RETURN

POSITION

the

in

as

program,

shown

preceding

;

block

TDD00

with

the

compensation

is

automatically

REFERENCE

the

tool

via

the

interim

to

AUTOMATIC

COMMAND

details

motion

in

the

Manual

TO

shown

REFER¬

area

2.8.11.3

AXIS

.DECELERATION

SWITCH

LIMIT

UNABLE

cancel

.

below

block

containg

tool

is

the

G28

position

on,

POINT

positioned

point,

reference

RETURN

(G28).

the

can¬

(C29)

of

Re¬

can

after

to

TO

(2)

in

ordinate

(3)

Motions

taneously

erse

the

(4)

Where

the struction

Coordinates

these

NOTES:

1.

Commanding

G28

an

2.

In

gramming

med

point

G29is

When

tance

between

programming.

tal

instructions

useful

to

reference

However,

.

direction

G28

point

EXAMPLE

two

28

20

N

G

G28

N25 N26

G29

GOO GOO

after

error

principle,

while

B

will

B1.

used,

points

return

system

zero.

"*•

B

C

"059."

and

along

for

is

programmed

B

created

effective

is

(absolute

of

interim

blocks.

X10.

X30.

X-40.

X30. X-40.

G29

turning

cancel

G28orG29.

offset

offset,

be

consideration

B

Especially

used

are

tool

the

after

B

two

the

tool

the

which

by

for

input)

Z20.

Z-50.

Z20.

Z-50.

without

the

on

tool

effective,

is

and

,

this

to

returning

+

are

D

axes

will

instruction

several

latest

the

point

;

the control

offset

If

they

and

the

C

is

when

function

the

original

to

made

in

rapid

not

motion

is

equivalent

X

(10.

-(30.

execution

before

are

the

tool

on

the

dis¬

unnecessary

incremen¬

is

co¬

the

simul¬

trav¬

move

in

is

omitted.

times,

G28

in¬

by

G29.

z

20.)

of

constitutes

pro¬

program¬

interim

will

pass

to

G28

G29

DO'*

X...

Point

X-*

Point

4s

j

/

6

A

..

Z

B

Z...

D

(REFERENCE

c

ZERO

i

B

t

-*ÿ

-*•

B

A

Point

(reference

Point

POINT)

MIEIENCE

INTERIM

Fig.

POINT

2.17

C

ZERO

zero

-ÿ

B

C

point)

D

D'

--'A<

/

A'

(REFERENCE

C

POINT)

ZERO

//

/

t

(1

t>#

(INTERIM

OFFSET

DISTANCE

POINT)

35

2.8.12

(C29)

NOTES:

Commanding

3.

PENSATION CYCLES

stitutes

EXAMPLE

N

N51 N52

N53

O

2.8.13

(1)

START

POINT

RETURN

(CONT'D)

50

T0300

G28

T0400

G29

/

4-

A

20

2ND

30

G

With

interim

an

W)

in

then,

and

tool

The

which

o—

(G70

an

error.

U80.

U-80.

B

K

j

/

REFERENCE

X(U)

command,

this

axial

two

moves

does

no

coordinate

Z

W

/

INTERIM

POINT

FROM

in

G29

mode

-

G76,

.

W20.

.

W40.

y-

*

N.

V-

2(w)

positioning

directions

not

S

U/2

/

REFERENCE

the

TOOL

(G40

-

G44)

G90,

;

+

POINT

,

•

tool

the

point

the

along

position

2nd

to

move

''*"01

X

POINT

RADIUS

or

in

G94)

and

G92

(REFERENCE

c

X

ZERO

POINT)

RETURN

moves

first

Z)

(X,

or

simultaneously,

reference

the

axis

is

specified.

2ND

REFERENCE

POINT

COM¬

CANNED

con¬

(C30)i

to

(U,

point.

for

EXAMPLE

C

20

NOTES:

Before

1.

tion

TO

2.

For

motion,there

ing

from

3.

The

Automatic

to

4.

When

moves

to

the

specified

2.8.14

(1)

G

With

polation

lation

tool

immediately,

when

(2)

The

varies

block.

a.

W

U-40.

30

INTERIlTfoiNT

TO

2ND

REFERENCE

POINT

30

commanding

the

2nd

control,

REFERENCE

of

REFERENCE

the

is

impossible

any

position

same

notes

Return

G30

command.

G29

is

commanded

the

interim

point

G30.

by

FUNCTION

•

command,

executed.

is

movement

specified

-

the

interim

31

via

position

SKIP

X(U)

this

interrupts

and

motion

When

mental

The

tool

with

interpolation

the

a

the

skip

with

moves

after

the

.

2ND

1’OINT

&

7

PARAMETER

G30,

G28

POINT

no

area

,

and

the

3.

and

4.

to

Reference

after

point

is

renewed

(

C

Z(W)

the

instruction

block

incrementally

block

••

a

special

under

interpolation

proceeds

received.

is

the

receipt

is

from

is

interrupted.

•

During

REFERENCE

0

1ST

,

POINT

\

#6613

the

after

MANUAL

or

be

must

POINT

from

where

can

tool

(5)

of

G30,

specified

G29.

by

only

)

3

1

(F(E)

••

linear

the

instruction,

this

the

to

of

programmed

in

the

point

FAKAMV

#601

2

REFERENCE

energiza¬

RETURN

executed.

RETURN

return¬

be

2.8.11

for

apply

Point

the

by

However,

the

in

•)

:

inter¬

interpo¬

motion

skip

in

accordance

where

K

IF

return

tool

G30

axis

block,

signal

incre¬

the

36

(2)

2nd

The

advance

reference

1st

parameters

reference

terms

in

4*6612

Fig.

point

2.18

point

of

the

commanded

#6613.

and

is

specified

distance

by

from

G28,

in

the

by

EXAMPLE

G31

G01

X

When

b.

lute

The

position

at

ceived,

EXAMPLE

G31

G01

the

W120.

U100.

z

the

values

tool

position

if

Z400.

X100.

ACTUAL

MOTION

moves

in

the

axis

X

; ;

120.

block

to

specified

where

is

;

,

ACTUAL

MOTION

SKIP

SIGNAL

for

the

not

O

z

Q

COMMANQÿJ

7

is

one

---

ON

programmed

axis:

specified

axis.

the

skip

specified.

COMMANDÿ!

400.

r

I

l

4

in

coordinate

remains

It

signal

r

i

I

is

100

50.

abso¬

re¬

D1A

(3)

(4)

a.

b.

(5)

NOTES:

When

1.

gram

cally

during

2.

Before

G40

SATION.

alarm

a

is

31

G

When

no

execution

tool

stops

"087"

is

The

feedrate

in

set

the

specified

Designation

normal

Presetting

When

values

as

programs,

skip

a

at

parameter

#6568

#6569

These

in

data

user

parameter

is

advanced

even

the

programming

cancelling

for

"024.

non-modal

skip

signal

the

of

at

the

displayed.

for

following

parameter

by

of

feedrates

signal

that

data.

for

storing

for

storing

can

macros.

when

execution

Failure

"

G

is

block

of

end

blocks

two

the

in

F

is

moment

X

Z

be

used

#6004Do

the

to

no

skip

of

G31,

TOOL

do

to

code.

received

containing

the

containing

methods,

#6019D4.

same

parameter

by

received,

are

automatically

coordinate

system

as

set

is

block

the

be

RADIUS

this

block,

way

to

block

is

sure

initiates

during

G31,

and

G31

selectively

as

with

#6323.

the

coordinate

value

variables

1,

the

automati¬

received

G31.

of

to

program

COMPEN¬

the

alarm

are

stored

pro¬

When

c.

lute

The

from

received.

EXAMPLE

G31

G01

the

values

tool

the

W100.

X300.

moves

point

block

to

at

:

Z200.

SKIP

SIGNAL

two

the

which

;

ON

is

programmed

axes:

commanded

a

skip

200

2

7

SKIP

SICNAL

signal

\

100

ON

in

position

\

300

\

3

abso¬

is

DIA

2.8.15

THREAD

This

function

taper

ding.

(1)

threads,

G32

With

to

coordinates

mental

nated

(2)

The

E

THREAD

CUTTINC

X(U)--.

this

the

point

coordinate

by

range

codes

CUTTINC,

is

for

scrolls

command,

(X,

or

F

of

is

as

(C32)

cutting

and

Z(W)-..

Z)

(U,

values,

E

code.

leads

follows.

CONTINUOUS

straight

for

continuous

F(E)

the

tool

specified

W)

specified

to

be

specified

threads,

thread-

•

.

cuts

threads

in

absolute

incre¬

in

a

at

lead

desig¬

by

up

and

F

37

2.8.15

THREAD

CUTTINC

CUTTING,

32)

(C

COUTINUOUS

(CONT'D)

Feedrates

follow

S

are

limited

.

s

spindle-speed

.is

Metric

Output

Inch

Output

(3)

The

codes

Limitation

\

+

I

F E

Metric

Input

Inch

Input

Metric

Input

Inch

Input

code

(x,z)

J

•

T

is

direction

shown

is

of

Taper

Table

Format

32

F

E34

24

F

E26

32

F

E34

F24

E26

normal

for for

precise

of

Direction

a

2.16

Programmable

for

Thread

F0.01

E0.

F0.

E0.

F0.01-F1270.00

E0.

F0.

E0.

lead

below.

Angle

45°

i

45°

>

0001

000004

0003

001 000010

thread

specified

Lead

of

Direction

Lead

of

Lead

of

-

Z-axis

X-axis

F500.

E500.

-

F19.6850

-

E1270.

-

F50.0000

-

cutting.

in

00

E19.

F50.

by

the

Range

Cutting

0000

685000

0000mm

000000

and

F

of

Lead

direction

mm

in.

in

mm

in

of

format

L

6

i

6

2

-

=

F(E)

X-axis

Table

G

G32

G G

G32

G

5.0

=

5.0

=

3.0

1.0

;

N.

x

threadcutting

of

2.17

Command

Z(W)

32

Z(W)--X(U)-..

32

X(U)

32

X(U)

32

X

Thread

mm

mm mm

mm

S

speed

(U)

Metric

Inch

The

half

(4)

output

upper

the

above.

Command

.

below

limit

Type

GOO

Normal

Precise

Normal

Precise

Normal

Frecise

Straight

lead

depth

U-42.

Straight

Thread

T

aper

Thread

Scroll

Thread

EXAMPLE:

E

Thread

Cutting

i

•

•••

•

,

24

000

2,

400

component

format

.

F.

E-

2(W)-

Z(W)

•••

F

.

E.

•

nim/min

m

is

.

••

•

F-

••

F-

.

/mm

shown

•

is

;

(

!

18

,

.

©

kVvVAAAW

60

6

-iu

I

m

20

+z

42.

44.

68.

F5.0

;

,

;

1

i

I

1

Oi

-

J

+x

POINT

w

L

V

2U\

(U*d)

t

U/2

X/2

\

START

POINT

r

t

i

END

1

lfÿri

Z

\

I

o'

Fig.

I

2.19

©

GOO

G32

GOO

+x

U

W

U-44.

W-68.

U

W-68.

G32

EXAMPLE:

Thread

Cutting

GOO

G32

GOO

G32 GOO

(5)

Continuous

(D

G

(G32)

(D

(G

(D

32

32)

Taper

lead

depth

X13. X38. X60.

W35.

X-ll.

X36.

X60.

\

+

60

1

(

X

X(U)

X(U)---

l<o

U

L

6

i

62=

DIA

thread

)

••

Thread

4.0

=

3.0

=

2.0

1.0

=

;

W-35.

;

W-35.

;

DIA"

•

r

1

<l<

(

Z

Z(W)

Z(W

mm mm mm

mm

F4.0

;

I

cutting

W)

)••ÿ

• •

®

*1

•

©

3

J1

9-

V

Xv7

)

(

b

;

V

1 1

i®

1

I

NOTES:

Allowances

1.

cutting

starting

Since

blocks

tinuous

thread

the

thread

boundary

X

-

the

is

thread

lead

because

and

time

stop

approximately

cutting

specification

becomes

of

blocks.

and

<5

1

lead

end

r

1

M

(J

,15

F(E)

•

-P

DIA

---

2.

3.

4.

&

If

spindle

cutting,

servo

Threading

G32.

commanded The

ing

lag.

If

following

thread

speed

the

leads

up

for

necessary,

.

operation

cutting

Worm

between

6

2

points.

AAAAAAAAAAA/

not

is

become

thread

G92

including

Screw

zero,

is

irregular

are

error

constant

is

(or

is

thread

smooth,

possible

is

changed

near

required

occurs

y

1

i

t

,!

I

during

incorrect

not

effective

G76~)

disregarded

G32

cutting

the

for

near

due

should

con¬

If

midway,

thread

the

thread

to

at

dur¬

the

be

This

command

i

executes

©

)

(

a

Pipe

thread

(D

Joint

cutting.

n

1

5.

6.

•

Feedrate

•

Feed

The

G98

in

Dry

In

rate.

G32

Override

Hold

command

mode.

Run

Operation

mode,

should

the

Regarded

not

tool

be

moves

100"

as

commanded

feed¬

Jog

at

39

IS

2.

8.

THREAD

(6)

Allowance

and

6

1

following

THREAD

CUTTINC

I

jare

6

equation.

CUTTINC,

for

lead

1

obtained

)

(

G

32

(CONT'D)

errorf

IAAAAAA/

2.20

Fig.

approximately

CONTINUOUS

62)

6

i,

from

the

after

point

cut

is

position

the

With

cutting

by

starting

the

starting

of

multi-start

a

thread

starting

the

spindle

pulse

by

point

the

cutting

position

thread

controlling

which

LEAD

pulse,

is

by

cutting

another

feed

displaced

a

preset

at

function,

the

an

angle.

starting

thread

angular

from

\

i

6

J

6

a

(lnT-»

EXAMPLE

Lead

Spindle

Thread

1

6

Equation

L

>

60

1/50

2

of

L.S

>

60.

-

S

K

1/100

91

3.61

thread

speed

cutting

(

K

3.0

60

Table

In

500

x

*K

L(ram)

S(rpm)

(-)

a

In

1/150

4.01

L

=

S

=

a

=

1

-

—

a

—

2.18

K:

3.0

500

1/100

1)

x

Meanings

.

Lead

Spindle

Constant

(Normal

30)

Accuracy

thread

Natural

(log

1/200

29

4

mm

rpm

3.61=

AL

L

1/250

4.52

of

e)

3.0

thread

speed

value:

of

Lead

error

logarithm

1/300

4.70

mm

(1)

G32

With

starting

displaced

to

by

specified

(2)

The

multi-start

as

Least

Programmable

When

The

only

(3)

Number

In

the

X(U)-..

command,

this

at

from

starting

the

B,

X(U)

to

by

data

specified

follows.

input

decimal

code

B

the

in

of

starts

principle,

workpiece

circumference

Two-start

Fig.

Z(W)..

an

angular

the

position

pulse

Z{W)

or

F

or

E

by

thread

cutting

increment:

range:

input

point

non-modal,

is

programmed

and

the

thread

circumference

into

Thread

2.21

the

by

code.

B

F(E)

•

cutsu

tool

position

corresponding

an

angle

point,

address

function

0.001

0

S

5

B

used,

is

andiseffective

block.

code

starting

should

equal

portions.

•

which

a

at

in

B

deg.

360.000

•

B

thread

is

specified

lead

the

is

Bl.=ldeg.

points

divide

on

2.8.16

With

two

without

cutting,

start

by

control

same

HO

6

2

MULTI-START

this

or

more

shifting

the

point

a

pulse

the

position

L-S

>

60

function,

threads

tool

pulse

generator

starting

around

K

the

feed

3.0

r

THREAD

multi-start

per

starting

is

(1

pulse

installed

point

the

500

X

K

60-

can

lead

point.

started

/revolution)

of

thread

workpiece

=

CUTTINC

threads

be

in

phase

on

the

0.

ram

83

(C32)

containing

machined

thread

In

with

generated

spindle

always

to

the

at

circumference.

1ST

2ND

3RD

4TH

4-START

STARTING

THREAD

POINT

i

NO

COMMAND

190

BIBO

1270

3-START

THREAD

2

-START

STARTING

+

1ST

THREAD:

2ND

THREAD

a

POINT

IK"

NO

CONtAND

BIlO

B

1ST

2ND

3RD

Fig.

STARTING

THREAD

2.22

THREAD

POINT

NO

B

COfftAND

1120

1240

NOTES:

Since

1.

(4096

dle

angular

to

command,

360°/4096

From

an

2.

The

can

directions

When

3.

succession,

trolled

mand

required

When

4.

outside

alarm

the

pulses/rev.)

pulse

the

starting

the

error

angular

specified

be

cutting

from

in

B

command

the

11

065"

angular

generator

position

the

pulses

position

to

up

position

by

if

the

first

from

permissible

is

position

of

point

least

0.

=

commanded

±1

pulse

in

BO

B

-

many

angular

the

starting

block,

2nd

the

is

displayed.

detection

generated

is

used

the

spindle

as

controlled

detectable

0879°/pulse.

may

from

the

both

forward

360,

commands.

multi-start

position

pulse

no

block

to

made

range

from

to

define

with

increment

by

occur.

starting

threads

by

B

command

on.

specify

(0

the

by

codes,

B

and

is

a

angles

360.000),

-

pulses

spin¬

the

respect

the

pulse

reverse

in

con¬

com¬

B

is

lead

or

by

SCREW

Thread

for

CUTTING

•

F(E)

screws

decrease

address

Cutting

variable

•

are

of

K.

2.8.17

(1)

B

is

(2)

VARIABLE

X(U)-..

G34

this

With

controlled

per

lead

2.23

Fig.

range

The

screws

lead

revolution

LEAD

Z(W)--.

command,

with

VARIABLE

Variable

of

K

as

is

THREAD

K--

variable

the

increase

specified

LEAD

Lead

programmable

follows.

EXAMPLE:

GOO

U--

•

• •

•

••

-

•

W-

U---

W--.

U--

W---

u

;

W'

•

••

G32

GOO

W-

u-

G

32

GOO

32

G

GOO

W-

•

U

32

G

Two-start

;

•

F

:

;

B180.

,

B180.

;

Thread

>

Threading

Least

of

part

@

a.

The

b.

The

in

c.

Feedrate

d.

Lead

input

0.

0001

(Metric

Programmable

highest

programmable

(metric)

lead

4194.

419.4303

total

is

303

or

displacement

within

mm

in.

change

variation

(metric

must

output)

value

increment:

mm/rev.

Input)

range:

feedrate

in

50

(metric

(inch

not

or

should

0.000001

is

within

range

/rev.

the

(inch))

resulting

following

output)

corresponding

exceed

540

inimm

not

be

minus

(Inch

5,400

the

(500

.

(inch

in/rev.

Input)

from

lead

to

mm

value.

mm

maximum

/rev

changes

/min

output).

NOTES:

are

When

1.

ous

interrupted

2.

If

alarm

When

3.

Run

specified

command,

is

When

4.

1,

mm/rev

Commanding

5.

alarm

variable

block

K

commands

n060"

G34

mode,

to

set

parameter

least

"060."

programs

at

will

command

the

by

parameter

if

1.

increment

or

0.0001

address

lead

block

exceed

be

tool

manual

10IN”

"

threads

,

command

junctions.

the

displayed.

is

executed

moves

SCRDRN

K

for

in./rev.

in

B

continuous

(#6006Ds)

commands

cut

pulses

permissible

in

at

only

G34

block

by

the

feedrate

(#6019

is

causes

continu¬

are

range,

Dry

speed

BIT5)

to

set

0.001

41

2.8.17

(CONT'D)

(3)

Confirmation

variable

K

a.

conditions

(i)

(H)

(m)

(iv)

b.

The

above

F:

K

W

s.

N

VARIABLE

lead

command

.

Feedrate

programmable

mm/rev

500

(inch

rev

Feedrate

value.

Accumulated

variation

lead

(metric

mm

output)

Feedrate

variation

(metric

control

•

.

using

Fixed

rev)

Variable

in/rev)

Distance

Z-axis

on

facing

For

U

as

Spindle

start

.

on

LEAD

calculation

thread

restricted

is

end

at

(metric

output)

end

at

output)

change

must

output)

checks

the

lead

between

(mm

X-axis.

speed

end

and

THREAD

cutting.

point

range.

point

of

value

must

corresponding

not

or

the

following

command

or

screw,

(rev/min)

for

points

for

the

in

must

output)

must

movement

not

exceed

or

419.4303

exceed

540

m/mm

restriction

equation.

(mm

start

inch).

distance

movement

(rev)

CUTTING

command

K

following

not

or

not

5,400

(inch

/rev

(mra/rev

end

and

is

exceed

in

50

be

minus

due

4194.303

(inch

in

to

lead

mm/mm

output

described

or

in/

or

points

specified

between

2.8.18

of

This

tool

the

switch

and

switch,

late

(1)

to

(2)

TOOL

function

offset

tool

(contact

when

the

G98

35

G

or

G35

With

in

a

signal

switch

set

value

tool

in

porated,

The

New

"

Absolute

at

touched

(Xj

Example

shown

value

is

replaced.

the

a

signal

new

X(U)---

Z(W)---

the

value

replaces

returns

which

new

offset

which

SET

for

is

to

detector)

tool

is

tool

offset

above

directions

for

tool

is

input

for

to

the

by

moving

tool

=

coordinate'

new

switch

or

Zj)

of

G35

.

below

ERROR

automatically

suit

comes

input

(F---)

(F.

instructions,

to

the

position

offset

COMPENSATION

to

the

this

For

installed

is

into

to

the

value.

;

••)

;

specified

contact

control,

the

tool

is

stored

start

correction

in

rapid

value

tool

operation

rewriting

tool,

new

purpose,

contact

control

Feed

-

X-Axis

Compensation

Z-Axis

Compensation

the

X(U)

by

with

the

calculated.

value.

of

point

traverse.

as

is

"Absolute

which

at

tool

(Xp

X-axis

for

when

a

touch

externally.

with

the

to

calcu¬

/Minute

tool

or

touch

tool-off¬

This

Then,

the

is

incor¬

follows.

coordmat

reference

touched

or

Zp)

is

(C35)

the

moves

Z(W),

the

block,

switcl

42

(i)

(n)

(m)

(iv)

(v)

alarm

N

•

j-

+

j

K-N

for

KN

for

2

)

for

£

for

mm

output)

Equation

+

F

Equation

(F

+

Equation

4-KN2

1

Equation

4194.303

(inch

in

Commanding

"060."

-(F

+

2

4194.

£

address

£-)

*

limit

;

500.000

50.

limit

KW

limit

303

419,4303

limit

5,400

(metric

in

0000

m

>

in

mm

(F

+

y

a.

0

a.

mm

a.

/mm

output)

B

(l)

mm

in

(ii)

(lii)

or

in

(iv)

in

+

K

/rev

or

G34

2

-§-)

or

540

or

block

K

2-

in/min

419.4303

causes

W

\

+

The

the

touch

#6624

U/

2

x

coordinate

reference

switch

(Xp)

CONTACT

7

HAX

MEASURABLE

Fig.

tool

must

and

%

/

value

makes

be

#6625

POSITION

2.24

(Xp

set

(Zp)

(XT-XP)-

IAT

7

XT

or

contact

by

in

NEW

API

0FFSET

xr

at

Zp)

which

with

parameters

advance.

to°1'

the

NOTE:

system

gramming

be

G50

(G50T),

the

respective

systems

two

will

scribed

or

large

is

commanded

G35

is

formed

(3)

For

direction

surement

touch

ing

displayed

(4)

The

is

a.

Programming

programs

(when

b.

By

advance

When

by

priority

In

designation)

the

"080"

EXAMPLE:

as

(N

N

N3

N

N5

N

N7

N8

In

principle,

for

determining

G35.

system

as

or

long

tools.

used,

are

be

added

above.

small

offset

on

programmed,

without

the

trouble.

values

and

should

switch

beyond

.

move

tool

specified

.

parameter

setting

.

the

speed

parameter

.

both

a

block

of

will

be

follows.

;)

28

1

G

2

G50

X400.

GOO

T0101

4

W-100.

X-200

6

G35

U-120.

GOO

T0100

G27

X400

The

coordinate

the

as

the

to

the

This

values,

the

coordinate

the

of

the

not

is

this

speed

in

the

by

feedrates

is

#6229,

b

and

in

the

G35.

displayed.

Program

;

use

the

Xp

work

same

When

difference

tool

may

result

machining

X(U)

limit

be

specified.

tripped

position,

towards

following

F

the

#6229

by

specified

the

,

program

preceding

Otherwise,

Z300

G98

:

Z300

same

or

Zp,

system

coordinate

system

different

between

offset

in

but

if

system

Z(W),

and

position

by

error

two

as

code

0)

is

parameter

by

parameter

G98

for

the

;

F20

;

coordinate

and

for

may

system

is

used

coordinate

value

abnormally

the

machining

in

will

be

the

of

this

Then,

the

tool

"0871'

the

touch

methods.

with

ordinary

#6229

codes

F

has

(mm/min

block

error

respective

pro¬

the

de¬

which

per¬

move

mea¬

if

is

or

either

for

the

mov¬

switch

in

and

the

in

tools

New

The

tool

value

NOTES:

1.

G35

S

2.

For

command,

tive

3.

If

constitutes

When

4.

compensation

displayed

5.

The

"083."

This

advertent

6.

Do

LOCK

If

LOCK

offset

impossible.

If

7.

LOCK

rather,

ed

X--200

1/

2'

“60

/

TOUCH

SWITCH

ON

tool

compensation

(-240.)

above

offset

.

is

non-modal

andTcodes

move

the

.

T

Calculated

offset

not

this

G35

point

is

code

G35

is

.

following

value

serves

omission

execute

ON

before

done,

is

ON

execution

value

command

state,

ON

the

and

an

100

N<

N

*

N«

40.

—

\

MOVE

TOUCH

-

offset

tool

01

No.

not

commanded

as

and

as

G

the

in

speed

Dry

Run

programmed

error

mode,

state

new

tool

protection

a

the

executing

the

correct

is

executed

no

moves

tool

then,

1

f

L-"”

--

y

Xp”

{PARAMETER

SETTING)

AMOUNT

SWITCH

value

(250.)

value

the

code.

same

of

the

function

"080."

in

alarm

an

constitutes

<

parameter

of

program

shift

during

will

be

compensation

offset

returns

—250

UNTIL

=

is

X-axis

Do

block

tool

the

Value

eters

#6624

against

with

G35

added

in

value

to

TOOL

NEWLY

SE1

.

N0

IS

ON

=

+10.

stored

not

under

is

before

tool

code

alarm

writing.

command

the

is

the

I

mm

i

m

offset

tool

M

write

G35.

with

G35

ineffec¬

G35,

radius

"024"

of

or

MACHINE

a

to

is

"082,"

param¬

6625

in¬

an

the

becomes

MACHINE

calculated;

command-

point.

start

the

,

this

new

U?

2.8.19

This

into

tool

operation

secure

hibited

STORED

function

the

mode

safer

areas

STROKE

for

is

prohibited

and

operation.

be

can

LIMIT

preventing

area,

manual

Three

set

up

the

in

both

operation

types

as

shown

(C36

C39)“

-

entry

automatic

mode,

of

below.

of

pro¬

to

the

G

36

The

single

•

U

•

L

Point

coordinate

area

check

code

W-

T

block

••

j

C

I.

t

Point

coordinate

function

G37

•

••

K

T

j

D

turned

is

;.

off

by

a

(1)

a.

b.

c

(2)

a.

b.

2ND

(BY

B

Setting

Set

B

The

B

This

.

programs

Setting

Set

D

Selectively

side

parameter

PROHIBITED

C36)

INSIDE

OUTSIDE

PROHIBITION

D

+

side

parameter.

by

area

is

prohibited.

area

side

the

by

of

+

Z

1st

outside

.

2nd

the

setting

AREA

OR

prohibited

boundary

can

not

prohibited

boundary

designate

area

#6007Dq.

1ST

(BY

OUTSIDE

C

F

3RD

AREA

Fig.

the

be

function.

between

PROHIBITED

PARAMETER)

INSIDE SIDE

i

PROHIBITED

(BY

2.25

area

and

A

range

specified

area

C

and

the

inside

points

AREA

PROHIBITION

OUT¬

OR

PROHIBITION

C38)

boundary

side

-

between

part

by

boundary

side

-

or

C

and

E

points

the

out¬

E

by

(3)

Setting

Set

a.

boundary

A

Selectively

b.

side

parameter

c.

In

function,

used

on

38

G

The

single

A

1st

prohibited

area

2nd

prohibited

area

3rd

prohibited

area

(4)

Table

Coordinate

3rd

up

side

point

of

the

#6007Di-

#6007DI

0

1

addition

the

to

set

area

•

U-

Point

coordinate

area

check

code

2.19

Setting

Point

prohibited

boundary

F

designate

area

between

to

the

following

a

prohibited

check

•

W-

•I-••

E

function

block

Patameters

Prohibited

X

A

B

C

D

E

F

system

the

by

the

Inside

Outside

method

function

L

Point

coordinate

G39

axis

#6600

#6606

#6500

#6502

#6504 #6506

for

area

point

setting

inside

points

Meaning

prohibition

by

instruction

area,

•••

K

T

F

is

,.

and

Z

#6601 #6607

*6501

#6503 #6505

#6507

area

and

E

function.

or

and

E

prohibition

the

setting

and

also.

J

turned

Settings

Area

axis

setting

-

side

the

out¬

F

can

be

turn

to

off

by

for

Division

Parameter

Setting

by

a

44

c.

#6007D0

In

addition

function,

used

on

the

to

0

1

set

area

to

the

a

check

Inside

Outside

method

the

following

prohibited

function

Meaning

prohibition

by

the

instruction

area,

also.

and

setting

can

to

be

turn

above

The

absolute

system

is

written

reference

crement).

become

matic

ecuted

control.

Points

values

(MACHINE).

as

point

Therefore,

effective

RETURN

once

after

the

on

distance

(1

unless

TO

A

through

the

machine

That

from

least

-

output

this

the

REFERENCE

the

energization

G

are

is,

the

function

manual

all

coordinate

position

(1st)

the

(move)

will

or

ZERO

of

set

auto¬

is

the

in

in¬

not

ex¬

(5)

Effective-ineffective

area

With

the

3rd

prohibited

effective

following

areas

and

ineffective.

selection

setting,

are

of

the

2nd

selectively

prohibited

and

made

the

'DVO

When

setting

Therefore,

specified

function hibited

mode.

(6)

Starting

When

point

the

check

Therefore,

prohibited

LIMIT

this

and

(7)

Stored

When

it

the

ERROR

only

tion

(8)

Displaying

With

current

prohibited

are

Stored

play.

NOTES:

1.

The

axes

2.

Two

overlapping

3.

In

CHECK

Setting

WOOlDj

#6001D2

G36

data

area

the

once

energization

function

ERROR

case,

change

stroke

the

stops

control

state.

be

moved

.

this

tool

displayed

Stroke

points

are

included

prohibited

the

MACHINE

function

0

2nd

1

2nd

0

3rd

1

3rd

through

are

the

G

by

becomes

is

area

tool

manually

if

area,

turn

the

tool

inside

just

enters

remaining

function,

position

area

on

.

prohibited

prohibited prohibited

G39

automatically

ON

or

code

commands

effective.

always

check

is

returned

or

of

the

is

started

the

reference

immediately,

will

be

off

the

data.

limit

error

enters

the

STORED

In

this

manually

the

in

the

on

the

Limit

Remaining

boundary

the

in

the

areas

LOCK

is

not

Meaning

area

check

area

check

area

check

area

check

commanded,

are

state

OFF

The

CHECK

the

in

to

the

automatically

control,

immediately.

point

caused.

area

check

the

prohibited

boundary

STROKE

case,

distance

and

X

CRT.

the

in

the

distance

the

boundary

andZdirections

Refer

line

prohibited

ON

be

mode,

set

can

effective.

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

rewritten.

ultimately

or

setting

1st

reference

the

is

STROKE

In

function

line,

tool

return

between

to

Distance

both

in

area.

with

AREA

pro¬

ON

after

area

in

the

area,

and

LIMIT

can

direc¬

4.

partial

these

the

of

3.

Dis¬

EXAMPLE

nOHUXTED

1ST

/ss/sssssvsyss//sss/ssss(ss/////S/S

/

AMA

*X

4

UNIIDE)

(-5000.

/

(-7000,

F

-10000)

AXE*

-8000)

E

MB

(-6000,

PROHIBITED

-9000)

Table

-6500)

2.20

AREA

(INSIDl

/

\

C\

/\

sXvssV

y

B-D

MB

s

/

S'

(-11000.

PROHIBITED

C

///

$

Parameter/

Setting

Inside

/Outside

#6007DO

#6007Di

#6500

Second

Third

the

4.

5

First

Area

#6501 #6502

#6503

#6504

#6506

#6507

#6600

#6601

#6606 #6607

A

V

/

)

/

.

7

--

Contents

-5000

-8000

-11000

-10000

-6000

-6500

-7000

-9000

2000

1000

-11000

-10000

(2000,

1000)

REFERENCE

POINT

WORKPIECE CENTER

0

>

)D

>

B

)

45

2.8.20

(C«0

TOOL

THROUGH

NOSE

G44)

RADIUS

*

COMPENSATION

URTl'Al

‘

IP

1

WM

Because

deviation

a

actual

not

are

he

1

problem

llu

PORT

ION

I

1

IT

l

\CL~

CUTTING

COMOvS

K/CJIS

(1)

.

a

.1

of

between

curve

enough

nose

tool

of

T1

777.

/

2

'A

NOSL

7.1

LOMPLNSATION

PROGRAMMED

Too]

nose

Radius

nose

Tool

storage

sation

can

the

Refer

be

machine

T

3-digit

T

4-digit

is

to

radius

nose

produced.

for

radius

nose

I

v

CITT

IV

NOSh

RADIUS

radius

value

storage

radius

before

commanded.

written

2.6.3

of

desired

the

Therefore,

taper

and

compensation

radius.

TOOL

CENTER

RADIUS

NOSE

TOOL

Wkdm

CUTTING

CONTOUR

9

16

WITH

COMPENSATION

.

2.26

Fig

values

value

tool

the

in

sets

or

50

Offset

Tool

tools,

lathe

curve

circular

See

Fig.

PATH

COMPENSATION

CENTER

r

CONTOUR;

TOOL

be

must

radius

nose

Number

storage

sets

Memory

and

tool

cuttings.

option

2.8.20.1.

WITHOUT

PATH

RADIUS

TOOL

written

of

pairs

depends

there

the

offsets

resolves

TOOL

WITH

COM-

CENTER

NOSE

compen¬

upon

1

.

R

in

that

is

R

ROUND

AIL

INSERT

2.27

Fig.

of

radius

compensation,

and

address

for

tool

character

nose

with

(In

the

Offset

offset

compensation

number

Tool

Direction

compensation

viewed

side

travel

tool

viewed

side

tool

travel

values

Writing

radius

sign

case

number

and

of

refer

tool

in

of

tool

the

R

for

tool

to

Fig.

Tool

Offset

R.

is

compensation

(+or-).

4-digit)

T

for

tool

radius

nose

direction

the

direction

II

positio

radius

the

(2)

R,

For

the

code

T

i

writing

radius

Displaying

The

designation

code

be

programmed

nose

4.3.5

Data.

T

The

a.

must

T

TT

it

ti

+n

_

+

1

••

Right

of

ri

••

•

Left

of

"T+"

x

46

b.

c.

Range

Radius

range.

Setting

Radius

out

0

*99.999

signs.

tool

of

value

Metric

of

value

tool

nose

can

of

nose

tool

radius

be

set

radius

nose

values

within

Inch

*9.9999

0

values

must

the

be

following

with¬

set

t

2.28

Fig.

b.

When

ing,

the

be

tool

a

as

the

correct

programmed

+X

77

7s

is

direction

~

s

777

used

for

with

RIGHT COMPENSATION

7

/s'

Fig.

2.29

turning

of

tool

of

compensation

of

sign

SIDE

LEFT

COMPENSATION

motion

T

code.

(T*)

SIDE

and

for

fac¬

changes,

should

(T-)

The

from

tion.

necessarily

be

tool

direction

+

to

-or-

G40

nose

radius

or

of

TDD

compensation

+

to

during

00

command

programmed

compensation.

is

program

should

to

cancel

changed

execu¬

the

not

(ii)

(111)

When

effect.

is

in

When'

of

code

becomes

the

06

effective.

power

RESET

group

supply

button

are

is

turned

is

depressed,

cancelled

and

on,

G40

G

G40

(3)

a.

b.

c.

(i)

designation

code

G

code

to

of

tool

G

of

G41, G42,

be

nose

codes

the

G

(G41

One

should

of

four

tween

center.

(•41

R

4,4

4

Regardless

compensation,

virtual

ing

Issue

pensation

Cautions

the

Since

07

other

tool

POS

G40

group,

switching

another,

to

cancel

tool

G44)

programmed

radius

specify

virtual

TOOL

CENTER

Fig.

of

the

nose

pushbutton.

to

cancel

.

in

programming

G40

to

they

G

code

one

the

compensation.

C42

nose

(.41

K

VIRTUAL

TOOL

R

the

is

G44

is

of

G40

\

G43

tool

2.30

mode

current

are

(G40

radius

compensation.

the

TIPS

to

compensation

G44

and

before

relationship

nose

of

tool

position

G44)

and

displayed

the

tool

G

code

are

modal

retained

commanded.

G42,

G41,

be

must

/

C40

and

T

the

execution

These

tool

the

nose

radius

of

depress¬

by

radius

nose

codes

G

until

the

Before

G43

and

intermediated

C41

code

be¬

the

of

G44

com¬

to

(4)

Tool

sation

Fig.

a.

motion

BLOCK

OF

COMPENSATION

CANCEL

WITH

CO!

(G40)

©

7777.

+x

(i)

When

programmed

of

(ii)

In

path

grammed

of

programmed

position

key

(

(iii)

The

compensation

intersection

and

above

nected

(iv)

Block block

form

mode

Program

these

motion

2.31

on

shows

.

t

/

\

RT-

4

Z

+

the

virtual

compensation

deviated

is

virtual

displayed

is

the

to

0

0).

connection

the

by

diagram

by

the

and

blocks.

tool

the

outline

the

©

/

M96

s

x//,

Fig.

2.31

compensation

contour

tool

tip

mode,

by

contour.

nose

tool

contour.

position

between

mode

of

tool

circular

,

blocks

a

circular

for

compensation

for

compensation

connection

compensation

should

be

nose

of

££9EÿIVE

r

[

:

PROGRAMMED

CONTOUR

is

meets

(

(o)

and

the

radius

Therefore,

does

But

by

depressing

of

virtual

two

provided

is

center

(M96).

arc

3

arc.

of

compensation

cancel

made

radius

tool

the

an

f

BLOCK

®

COMPENSATION

START

WITH

cancelled,

with

©)

tool

from

the

meet

not

current

the

tool

blocks

paths

are

4

and

start

cancel

mode.

carefully

compen¬

OF

(G41)

GOO

the

path

.

center

the

pro¬

path

with

POS

tip

in

the

by

(M97)

the

In

con¬

and

per¬

for

n*i

b,

Relationship

pensation

Tool

the

offset

and

nose

radius

programmed

the

by

between

tool

compensation

contour

tool

position

tool

position

nose

offset

which

offset

radius

apply

has

function.

com¬

to

been

47

2.8.20

(C40

(5)

a.

TOOL

THROUCH

to

How

Compensation

offset

enter

number

through

mode

set,

is

started.

is

entered code

T

the

does

and

order

not

NOSE

G44)

More

when

G

in

affect

RADIUS

compensation

mode

is

T

by

code

are

instructed.

tool

nose

precisely,

the

code

is

which

the

these

operation.

COMPENSATION

mode

set

when

and

G41

When

radius

AND

compensation

condition

established.

codes

are

both

the

(or

G42

this

between

Hence,

specified

tool

mode

is

X)

GOO

(2)

G01

(D

G02

Compensation

(b)

Mode

T

+0202

G

41

U

30

.

X20.

W-15.

;

Z7.

F600

115

;

F0.2

1

Movement

of

Compensation

G01)

(for

at

Start

G

41

(a)

«

T0101

G41

I

•

1

I

V)

E

!

Hi

a

s

:

o

the

At

b.

offset

is

block

sation

after

right

is

specified

ified

Sample

(T)

©

Compensation

;

,

G41

mode

T

of

.

G00

GOO

G01

%

I

c

C

vi

c

ii

a

E

8

start

onto

to

code.

tool

and

Program

(a)

T-0101

G41

18.

Z-

Mode

(b)

G41

T0101

J

of

compensation,

the

normal

G44

which

or

first

The

advancing

to

(A):

,

30.

X

F0.25

;

of

offset

the

Z

|

o

1/5

C

a

£

o

u

of

entered

the

is

direction

left

,

5

;

(c)

v

G41

.

—

E

U

'

the

origin

the

block

made

when

•Movement

Start

sation

I"

G

T0101

tool

;

center

of

the

compen¬

immediately

to

the

+

T

when

is

T-

spec¬

at

of

Compen¬

GOO)

(for

41

DIA

50

c.

If

satisfying

does

pensation

on

Since

such

GOO

the

G

result

EXAMPLE

has

CD ©

©

the

G

code

block

not

normal.

G41

movement,

a

or

G01

code

other

in

no

move

GOO

G01

+x

a

/I

the

have

starts

(or

alarm

(B):

(c)

T

G

X---

CENTER

G41

of

compensation

the

and

G42

th

in

01

of

than

"026.

G41

command.

+0303

41

F-

Z---

GOi

/

10.

(or

move

through

it

last

group.

GOO,

;

•

©j

G42

the

necessary

is

or

"

(or

;

•

F

command,

current

GOI,

G42

•

through

mode

tool

center

G44)

involves block

Specification

and

through

;

•

G44)

condition

com¬

the

is

moved

to

specify

for

of

Gil

will

G44)

a

48

+X

&

G00

'

,r

1,4)

CD

5

MOVEMENT

4.

.-J

COMPENSATION START

COMMAND

BT

AT

2

(T)

©

(D

(d)

GOO G01 G03

T-0404

G44

X--

F---

Z-..

;

I--.

F

MOVEMENT COMPENSATION START

BY

COMMAND

2

ii)

<

•

AT

For

is

more

trolled

M96

M97

an

outside

than

by

the

Tool

circular

Tool circular

(execution

calculation)

corner

180°)

following

radius

(tangent-line

,

movement

the

M-code

compensation

ON

path

compensation

OFF

path

intersection

of

angle

is

con¬

commands:

Note

normal

diately

T

through

block

move

the

on

fied,

consecutively.

blocks

caused

(6)

Movement

When

is

the

However,

contours

<«>

the

that

the

to

after

code,

for

(b).

or

the

command

compensation

that

block.

to

up

have

.

m

the

tool

entered

mand,

nose

the

command.

lated

tour

for

the

which

path

radius

modeiscancelled

by

the

be

may

the

inter-block

:

CENTER

tool

start

G41

each

If

block

,

one

With

two

blocks

However,

move

no

compensation

nose

by

G41

tool

center

has

by

the

The

path

control.

specified

the

following

I

center

point

(or

G42

of

above

(or

G41

following

block

start

no

command,

radius

(or

been

program

is

movements

CM

is

offset

the

of

through

examples

G42

through

T

ahead

operation

command

move

may

be

three

if

mode

compensation

through

G42

keeps

moving

offset

command,

G40

by

or

automatically

So,

only

in

the

part

should

the

onto

G44)

has

is

read

is

performed

imme¬

(a)

G44)

speci¬

block

code

programmed

more

or

error

an

G44)

along

tool

the

by

until

TDD00

calcu¬

the

cut

program.

considered

be

special

and

or

no

and

is

mode

com¬

con¬

b.

M97:

Movement

the

However,

'’overcut"

an

with

Movement

The

instruction

ently

along

position.

so

path

MOVEMENT

TOOL

S

y

M96:

/

Intersection

M96,

the

in

Care

that

y

of

M96

when

GOO

each

tool

y

«*,

--

Circular

y'ÿ

/

y'

circular

block

is

in

M97

GOO

should

used

there

cutting

mode

axis

does

V

Computing

path

.

is

should

positions

toward

be

not

Path

for

special

taken

Mode

is

this

a

possibility

be

tools

the

contact

COO

Mode

included

operation

shapes

used.

independ¬

final

on

the

m

of

offset

cutter

work.

a.

Inter-block

(i)

For

less

is

computed

is

point

PASSING

POINT

inside

an

than

computing

V

X

/

INTERSECTION

movement

corner

180°)

is

and

formula.)

(tangent-line

,

the

passed.

itersection

(Intersection

angle

point

GOO

G01

OR

PROGRAMMED

COMMAND

Fig.

2.32

G01

49

(C40

(o)

ml

TOOL

THROUGH

Movement

Programming

modi

lie

*«r

1

u

i

V

)

i

Coned

i.iretui

ip>‘d

g

in

NOSE

C44)

.n

lulling

1

l*

<

RADIUS

(CONT'D)

Dispensation

i

unsideration

to

not

contour.

COMPENSATION

mode

in

compensation

program

T+

a

T-

i

sr'-'*x

WliL*.

|

j

JK

THr

M9?

(Cont'd)

wedge-

OOL

CW.0T

H

1X.E

NCISI CIT

LUII]

mode

control

tool

gives

(dwell),

ahead

blocks,

impossible

be

obtained.

G41

two

.

G41

involving

normally

radius

the

no

instructions

to

G44

or

more

in

the

F---

no

compensation

tool

path.

coordinate

control

the

and

makes

tool

and

Therefore,

are

blocks

compensation

,

movement

reads

If

calculations.

are

radius

accurate

used

two

blocks

either

instructions

reads

missing

compensation

tool

in

ensurethat,

without

plane

in

lonipcn-

mode

of

a

in

path

a

program

movement

will

ahead

and

these

such

block

When

three

be¬

can¬

after

not

Conn

d.

satiuii

The

during

calculates blocks

G04

as

further coordinate

or

more

comes

not

where

them,

OF

IV

command

follow

G01

M97

1

)

I

/

M.-7

t>n;_r

tool

A

(,.»#•.«

r-'

L.

nos<

to

ro

A

S3

T-1-

m

“1

'he

oi

I

tool

2R

i

t

P

diameter

T-

M97

PROGRAM

THAT

2R

WEDGE

movement

TOOL

CAN

can

GET

so

IS

be

MADE

NOSE

IN

that

SO

OF

THE

the

in

the

e.

g

-A

PROGRAMMED

(GO!

Tf

CONTOUR

MODE)

4

c

1

MODE)

CONTOUR

PROCRAMMED

(GO

1

U---

G04

M-

;

M40

no

movement

If

in

three

the

of

is

it

three

dummy

on

block

on

offset of

Use

If

in

offset

a

The

movement.

purpose

tool

the

address

used

are

I:

X-axis

K.

Z-axis

consecutive

the

normal

immediate

dummy

impossible

or

more

the

normal

block

This

of

providing

nose

radius

of

this

.

dummy dummy

Compensation

made

blocks

instruction

blocks

line

blocks

to

specify

consecutive

line

may

be

does

block

the

computation.

dummy

command command

the

by

without

,

at

before

is

inserted.

not

specifieid

is

data

command,

is

normally

or

two

move

is

programmed

center

tool

the

end

them

a

move

blocks

satisfactory,

not

cause

an

necessary

I

(incremental).

incremental)

<

less

cotnmanc

point

command

and

actual

for

For

and

is

the

for

the

K

.

\

V

T-

it'

EXAMPLE:

G01

N

1

2

N

X-

Z--

N5

•

I-

N6

Mxx

N7

G04

N8

MAA

N9

X-

NIO

1

Z--

Nil

Namely,

K,

which

mand,

Remarks:

is

a

circular

linear

tion

the

EXAMPLE.

NIO

Nil

N

N13

N

12

14

dummy

of

circular

G01

Mxx

MOO

MAA

G41

•

Z-

•K-•

U-

•

Nil

o-

+X

specify

are

N6

in

the

Z---

I(-a)

X---

;

••

;

*

-

;

•

••

Z-

;

1

K

THREE

MORE

Z

+

incremental

equivalent

for

the

If

purpose

interpolation,

block

tangent

command.

F---

K(-b)

Z---

Three blocks

or

NIO

NO

MOVE

dummy

that

line

more

Dummy

•

F

Dummy

N5

BLOCKS

INCLUDING

OR

COMMAND

commands

NIO

to

block.

of

the

generate

specifies

at

the

;

block

;

block

dummy

start

the

com¬

the

direc¬

point

I

block

and

of

and

I

type

By

block

ing

Switching

f.

mode

This

between

compensation

EXAMPLE:

5

N

N6

N7

N8

N9

NIO

'////,

should

K

the

of

(M96:

*v

of

block

NIO

dummy

circular

between

compensation

T+

T+0101

GOO

G41

X--X-

G01

X---

;

T-0101

••

X-

N9

N8

Gr

signed

be

circular

CIRCULAR

arc.

PATH

•ska

rt

NIS

'

Nil,

stops

movement.

and

by

•

Z--*

•

F

provides

T-

G40

;

Z...

Z.

F600

•''1

NIO

point

at

and

T*

without

or

;

F-

•

-A

/

V.

/

$

/

according

MODE)

NIO

linear

the

T-

T

Designates

hand

sation

proceeding

•

;

—

.(M96

j

!

to

command

the

for

A

m

the

follow¬

compensation

switching

cancelling

command.

right-

compen¬

side

facing

direction

;

Changes

side

hand

compensation

MODE)

LEFT

SIDE

COMPENSATION

RIGHT

SIDE

COMPENSATION

Z

the

left-

(T-)

(Tf)

N15

16

N

•

G02

•

X-

CENTER

‘l

su

N1

1

(LINEAR

Z

•

t

-b

DUMMY

LINE)

•

I

a

—

BLOCK

•

NIO

;

•

K

•

compen¬

Modification

g.

sation

It

number

The

remains

is

mode

invalid

is

by

originally

valid

cancelled

of

to

code

T

by

tool

newly

in

specified

until

G40

offset

volume

specify

compensation

tool

the

compensation

or

TDOOO

in

tool

a

offset

command.

offset

mode.

number

mode

51

2.8.20

(C40

((>)

(7)

.

a

2

r

i

o

V

.a

a

E

0

O

b.

TOOL

THROUCH

Movum

However,

changed

tents

tool

fied

operation.

tool

offset

the

with

buffer

to

How

When

sation

nose

tool

,

40

G

T0100

I

pon

center

end

point

mode,

for

that

specified.

which

specified

portion

Then,

tool

nose

command

NOSE

C44)

MI

in

compensation

the

too!

by

varying

corresponding

offset

After

number

block

newly

.

T>'

cancel

G40

mode

,

termination

is

or

results

is

the

compensation

TDDOO

or

cancelled,

is

radius

T0100

,

40

G

offset

of

the

block

the

which

(Consequently,

in

G40

produced.)

moves

tool

matches

specified

RADIUS

(CONT'D)

nose

the

to

number,

this

is

made stored

/T

is

compensation

,

of

compensation,

onto

the

final

immediately

G40

or

acute-angle

or

TDDOO

so

end

the

G40

in

COMPENSATION

mode

(Cont'd)

radius

offset

the

by

value

memory

originally

means

modification,

valid

beginning

in

the

BLOCK

NEWLY

OF

TOOL

VALUE

READ

CHANCE

RADIUS

TIP

mode

operation.

T0100

line

in

compensation

before

has

a

retracting

contour

virtual

the

of

TDDOO

compen¬

specified,

terminating

E

;

G40

normal

block

TDDOO

that

point

or

if

block,

may

speci¬

of

MDI

the

prefetch

AFTER

NOSE

the

;

the

to

been

is

no

uncut

the

block.

be

con¬

new

tool

the

move

©

c.

©Pi

(T

+0202,

G01

G01 G01

GOO

12

2

the

If

sation

mand

specified

SI

1

Cb

lb

REFERENCE

ij-

(b)

G41)

X

U

G

T

1

block

cancel)

,

the

MF

ION

I

Til.

(IIO.HU)

•

24.

40 +0200

virtual

end

-..IE

01

X

of

TOOI

I

FM

THb

TOOL.

coo

/

&

•

Z-

F0.3

80

;

+x

G40

does

point.

*\>s

\s-

i

1'OslTlOM

bOR

THE

MOTION

PLETION

PENSATION

•

F

,

.

Z40.

)

(Nose

not

tool

1

-

•

4

have

nose

©w

F6.

radius

moves

ON

;

the

COM¬

OF

(GOO)

G41

+z

compen¬

move

to

COM¬

com¬

the

EXAMPLE

(T

o

w

J)

|f®

u"L©

©

52

(a)

+0101

G02

G01

GOO

T0100

,

A

G41)

U20.

G

40

,

F0.25

X110.

MOTION

TION

(GOO)

;

Z40.

COMPLE¬

ON

COMPENSATION

OF

;

EXAMPLE

G40

in

(c)

(T-0303,

G01

0

(2)

G01

COO

:

B

block

G41)

X--.

G40

T-0300

/

Move

for

Z-..

F---

wan

command

cancelling

F-..

:

;

MOVEMENT

2

COMPENSATION

START

is

compensation.

;

C

41

AT

2

BY

not

included

NOTES:

Programmed

a.

errors

(i)

(a)

Inside

sation

When

programming

compensation,

Programmed

'OOL

u

d

r

<

1

compen¬

error

shapes

arc

if

that

an

radius

(b)

produce

inside

tool

R

C

<ST

Inside sation

input

arc

radius

r

<

compen¬

error

with

d

tool

d

(T

®

(

2

+0404

)

d.

(d)

G44)

,

X-

G02 G01

G

GOO

that,

Note

through

offset

of

the

TQDOO

When

celled

tool

position

formed

nose

tool

cancel

The

ment

in

last

the

position

existence

cancel

command

•

-

40

F

T

+0400

i

for

(b),

the

onto

block

command.

nose

tool

by

the

concurrently

radius

operation

which

specified

offset

of

either

.

•

Z-

K-

-.

;

/

each

the

tool

normal

immediately

radius

of

use

offset

compensation

virtual

the

position

has

been

these

operations

of

them

•

:

of

•

F

•

!

MOVEMENT

I

COMPENSATION

START

COMMAND

C

above

center

to

hne

before

compensation

TDD00

cancel

operation

the

with

provides

tool

cancelled.

the

by

for

AT

2

BT

44

examples

temporarily

is

the

G04

command,

operation

termination.

the

nose

which

not

is

of

use

end

or

is

move¬

matches

tool

If

desired,

G40

(a)

point

can¬

the

per¬

at

co¬

(ii)

n

L'J

When

locus

NO

J2

no

intersection

of

the

INTERSECTION

NO

\

1

offset

-A*-,

\x_y

(a)

INTERSECTION

\

(b)

Outside

is

even

tool

correctly

when

point

center.

-i

-ii

tl//

compensation

mode

<

r

exists

I

TOOL

d

on

the

53

2.8.20

(C40

(m)

TOOL

THROUCH

When

close

med

Arc

t.i)

Reversing

NOSE

C44)

reversing

to

reversing

in

M97

Path

RADIUS

(Outside

Off)

command

(CONT'D)

command

mode.

COMPENSATION

or

Corner

angle

an

is

program¬

Circular

d.

(i)

(11)

When

mand

ing

Tool

The

the

"00,”

of

two

meanings:

position

nose

following

tool

offset

TDD00

offset

radius

program

number

command

cancelled.

is

compensation

be

can

is

T

has

specified

code

the

is

cancelled.

com¬

follow

n

V

(b)

Command

Case

„

M96

In

correctly

G

codes

b.

rule

As

a

should

Usable

GOO,

90,

C.

•

0

1

G

97

G

Constant

,

control

,

C

G

98

99

•

(

90

G

•

function

Teed

,

G

9

1

Absolute/incremental

designation

G02.

G03

,

22

G

2

1

G

•

Command

circular

,

7

G

•

Multiple

•

1

GI12

070.

•

Gill,

-

(Beveling,

The

c

fied

subprogram

in

command

c

6

mode,

<

linear

of

compensated.

usable

codes

G

not

beused

G

codes

GOO,

,

04

G

surface

)

23

G

including

arc

G72,

G73

repetitive

cornering

rounding)

compensation

A

to

close

11.7°

of

all

in

compensation

other

the

in

Gil

speed

designation

cycle

(M98

or

mode.

B

reversing

above

the

than

compensation

Inhibited

the

compensation

cancel

start

M99)

c

H

c

shapes

mode

shown

Remarks

block

may

or

be

A

»

below

in

of

speci¬

are

mode.

N

N41

e.

Inhibition

(l)

(u)

Command

f.

compensation

The

tool

pensation

The

performed:

2

41

G

GOO

3

GOO

21

25

GOO

40

GOO

G40

Operation

formed

RESET

pensation

operation

the

possible

G40

through

operation

following

radius

command

,

T

+0101

T0100

T-0202

T0200

;

of

MDI

the

in

the

m

button

cancel)

in

.

G44

in

MDI

or

operation

command

compensation,

completely

or

TOOL COMPENSATION

MODE

NO.

TOOL COMPENSATION

TOOL

OFFSET

;

TOOL

COMPENSATION

MODE

TOOL

;

mode

MDI

mode

compensation

is

depressed,

becomes

the

MDI

cannot

mode.

for

or

temporarily.

operation

RADIUS

WITH

"01"

RADIUS

POSITION

RADIUS

WITH

NO.

cannot

mode.

G00

effective

mode

be

written

cancelling

operation

cancels

should

TOOL

"02"

be

When

(com¬

becomes

by

during

com¬

the

not

be

CAN CEL

per¬

and

the

54

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6*

g.

Commands

The

for

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

h.

Even

sation

circular

than

follow

directly

those

Three without

MOO

or

M-code

for

eter

advance

(6

Max)

M02,

Reset

Turning

following

they

G28,

50,

G

G74,

G90,

G31

G68,

122,

G

in

and

the

which

consecutive

move

M01

command

set

by

stopping

reading

M30

commands

operation

off

causing

commands

cause

G29,

G

51

75,

G

G92,

-

G35

G69

G

123

M96

mode

circular

arc

distances

fixed

corner

point

to

are

command

param¬

power

error

errors.

G30

G76

94

G

(tool

values

circular

.

B

set

blocks

supply

arc

AX,

,

The

by

/

must

nose

radius

are

path

AZ

tool

the

arc

fixed

parameter

zsX/2

Temporarily

>

cancelled

Completely

>

cancelled

be

not

compen¬

on),

smaller

are

not

does

path

but

values

#6230.

given,

if

moves

are

EXAMPLE

NJ

CSO

X140

N

2

COO

S

(COO)

3

N

C01

N4

MS

N

N9

N

Nil

N N N

N

rn

!

6

7

8

10

12

13

14

1

16

17

1

no

Z0

X

20

Z-20

30

X

C

W-

12

XS0

Cll

CO)

G22

CO)

G04

(COD

S

X

120

C00

40

C

5

D1A

r

90

D1A

20

no

--

A:

o

n

1700

M03

T*0202

.

,

-

S360

.

CANCEL

TOOL

COMPENbAl

bl

RO BEVELING

C41

X0

Z5

F0

2

w-

15

SHOO

.

20

13

S700

K-3

X-70

90

2-90

X

X110

U0

140

X

Z-110

R20

,

300

S

DWELL

-

.

70200

30

Z

""COMPENSATION

N

16

O

.

CENTER

TOOL

PATH

'

i

50

MM

3

i

R3

r—

D1A

BEVELING'

ROUNDING

20

-90.

/

D1A

30

)5

20

70

--

NOSE

BLOCK

ART

LADING

CIRCULAR

ARC

,

-

RADIUS

TOOL

OMPEN-A

COMPLETE

COMPENSAl

START

15

ION

BY

NObE

1

ION

-

BLOCK

.....

TOOL

POSITION

OFFSET

MOTION

PROGRAMMED

CONTOUR

K>\

+x

I

l

:

FT)

K

'

T

20

PlAÿft-g)

N4,

20

5

TOOL

COVJ'I

TION

-£ÿ-02

-

S

i

/

f

t

*

7N3

I

t

j

i

l

«

•

K

1/

NOsh

NhA-

TOOL

In

case

PROGRAMMED

of

COMMAND

A

S

X/2

S

Z

NEGNR:

S

NEGNR

Constant

parameter

TOOL

MOVEMENT

value

for

setting

55

2.8.20

(C40

l)

(

TOOL

THROUGH

to

How

RADIUS

calicos

C44)

compensation

COMPENSATION

(CONT'D)

mode

(Cont'd)

~\

PRESENT

OF

TOOL

POSITION

TIP

\

is

T-t-

(b)

decided

043

T+

042

043ÿ

T-

042

t

All

raj

C43

-'L.

;

:

L.

04

1

T—

*

i

4

CM

T—

Round

by

(a)

r

/

setting

T+

+

T-

Normal

042

T-

043

T+

Insert

X

Gai

7

x

T+

Insert

G4J

T+

x

044

T-

(G

of

side

J

\

code

virtual

*

042

T+

043

T-

C44

-J

I

i

*T-

All

to

044

T-

C41

T_

CM

T-*-

041

T+

Round

be

tool

Virtual

Tool

used

In«erc

Nos*

nose.)

(2)

50

G

When

instead

dinate

values

absolute

When

the

incremental

useful.

groups.

length

second

incremental

coordinate

G50

+x

POSITION

THE

GROUP

U---

U100.

SECOND

the

addresses

of

is

set

(X-axis)

U

coordinate

the

tools

The

Then,

of

the

group

B

ABSOLUTE

POINT

Fig.

W-.-

X

and

by

up

are

G50

tools

the

reference

of

tools

G50

command

system

W-100

100

50

OF

ZERO

0)

(0,

2.34

(Incremental

;

U

Z,

the

adding

and

previously

very

(addresses

should

difference

can

;

G50

OF

(C50

A

and

new

(Z-axis)

W

different

be

tool

can

be

and

be

stored.

•

COMMAND

REFERENCE

i

G50)

W

are

specified

absolute

incremental

set.

in

U,

divided

between

and

that

set

at

an

absolute

Setting

Position

•

Z

X

coor¬

to

the

length,

W)

is

into

the

of

the

of

B

POSITION

TOOL

,)

••

two

2.8.21

POINT

Absolute

mo\

coordinate

the

on

(1)

56

2.33

Fig.

Code

T

of

II

PROCRAMMING

(G50)

coordinate

e

command.

system,

absolute

G

50

X-

command

This

tool

tip

values

The

X

and

es

and

tip

Therefore,

set.

command

Relations

lor

After

coordinate

•

Z

the

with

Z

are

the

specifies

Tool

system

all

•

makes

absolute

a

the

absolute

between

Nose

OF

setting

motions

the

coordinates

sign

distances

zero

can

it

the

G

Radius

ABSOLUTE

should

the

up

can

system.

present

following

point

said

be

absolute

code

Compensation

ZERO

set

be

absolute

commanded

be

position

(X,

the

between

(0,

that

zero

and

before

Z)

address¬

tool

0)

to

"G50

point."

-*-Z

Fig.

2.35

of

.

be

(3)

NOTES

1.

2.

3.

Assume

tool,

and

coordinate

ing

G50

then,

tool

the

sation

to

If

with

position

figure

point

3

N

N4

10

N

the

select

operation,

G50 GOO

coordinate

the

pensation

shown

above,

programmed

for

When

in

GOO

This

offset

G

50

in

G

all

:

T,

the

should

designates

G50

GOO

is

the

codes,

tool

block

motion.

X-..

S500

a

specified

S*

•

G50

separate

system

G50

set

setting.

should

and

the

that

perform

X80.

the

compensation

below

.

A

X80.

T0101

GOO

T0202

-f-X

Z-62w»

'

C50

POSITION

:

I

TOOL

reference

is

applied

on

noses

S

and

following

be

M03

nonmodal

M,

and

the

in

;

or

•

feature

be

tool

radius

tool

No.

the

system

Z62.

tool

No.

and

Z62.

;

dX,

7H

COMMAND

AT

NO

01

2.36

Fig.

system

tool

to

the

tool

a

single

.

M

commands

programmed

traverse

the

Z-..

T0101

code

G

block.

S,

and

same

block.

G50

T

and

is

commanded

compensation

01

setting

for

this

02

value

peroform

the

tool

TOOL

i

setting

and

the

movement

coordinate

that

containing

in

;

which

Generally,

codes

T

*

•

not

after

is

the

of

tool:

which

the

No.

02

NO.

+z

tool

other

are

programmed

the

rate

is

Note

;

command

for

coordinate

the

reference

the

has

shown

compen¬

02

is

performed

position

tool

may

system

block.

for

valid

the

cannot

that

tool

are

follow¬

the

in

moves

com¬

as

be

G50,

tool

only

other

be

a

is

off¬

cancelled

When

4.

sent

(0,

system

5.

The

dinate

ABSOLUTE"

6.

The

affected

system

ations

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

7.

When Work

effective.

2.8.22

50)

(G

t

function

This

with

S

(1)

G50S---

Four

specifies

in

limit

spindle

(2)

In

mode,

as

too

the

EXAMPLE

The

2000

NOTES:

Maximum

1.

be

4.

2.

The

cleared

3.

In

address

machine

designation,

the

position

0).

Therefore,

should

current

system

coordinate

by

is

:

reset

The

2,

4.

3.

4.

formed.

XO

G50

and

mode

The

power

setting

Coordinate

MAXIMUM

4-

it

dig

digits

rpm.

issued

is

speed

(Constant

G96

when

current

the

small,

limit.

S2000

G50

maximum

rpm

displayed

3.

2.1

Display

specified

by

of

case

S

tool

power

supply

of

tool

be

position

is

shown

current

of

set

system

reset

operation.

reset

by

operation

POSITION

;

command

Z0

is

executed.

turned

is

work

System

SPINDLE-SPEED

used

for

is

designation

following

the

upper

an

If

S

in

is

spindle

X-coordinate

the

spindle

;

spindle

.

spindle

reset

S

is

speed

on

the

of

maximum

operation.

4-digit

not

shown

builder's

this

is

set

the

absolute

before

up

the

of

in

position

which

of

one

by

ABSOLUTE)

on

coordinate

Shift

the

option.

the

limit

command

subsequent

governed

Surface

speed

specified

CRT

Command

spindle

designation

by

manual.

function

turned

to

the

coordinate

operation.

tool

in

"POSITION

display.

was

The

the

following

ORG

key

written

is

again.

system

2.6.5

in

SETTING

control

provided

address

spindle

of

exceeding

blocks,

at

the

Speed

rises

of

the

is

clipped

is

clipped

display.

Data.

speed

B

rpm.

For

cannot

on,

the

G50

coor¬

set

is

not

coordinate

oper¬

(see

is

per¬

in

by

will

S

speed

the

upper

Control)

too

up

tool

by

G50

Refer

is

,

unit

Refer

2-digit

S

used.

be

pre¬

MDI

G50,

be

limit.

fast

is

at

can

to

not

of

to

57

2.8.23

(C50T,

WORK

G51)

COORDINATE

i

MULTI-SHIFT

Z

+

This

Work

lienee l.trmliur

The

"work

work

the

G50T

ing

ment

gramming

dinate

(1)

.

a

b

.

c

feature

Measured

it

with

coordinate

position

system

Tool

is

It

write

the

ing

Value

he

'I

memory

tool

of

below

1

2

3

For

tool

for

No.

Tool

used

is

Value

is

necessary

paragraph

purpose

as

used

coordinate

of

be

may

throughout

coordinate

necessary,

the

coordinate

tool

coordinate

procedure,

Direct

number

units

offset

Number

offset

combinations

memory

0

to

0to16

0

to

ease

of

No.

etc.,

51.

Coordinate

Memory

in

Direct

of

this

system"

absolute

system

each

tool.

performed

value

before

see

Input."

available

of

corresponds

memory

tool

of

9

50

use,

write

01

in

as

shown

combination

Input'1

for

the

6.2.3.

feature

with

zero

setting

In

with

the

memory

specifying

data

memory.

"6.2.3,

combinations

the

tool

coordinate

below:

with

option.

programmer

to

is

retain

a

certain

point

by

the

at

other

entire

words,

a

single

machining

(number)

G50T,

for

each

For

the

Work

Measured

coordinate

tool

to

the

number

Available coordinate

number

to

59

51

to

66

51

80

to

51

coordinate

memory

Tool

No.

"6.2.3,

to

a

point

perform¬

replace¬

pro¬

coor¬

tool

to

writ¬

as

shown

tool

memory

(9) (16)

(30)

data

be

on

.

Zln

Zm

"WORK

OPERATOR

DIRECT

At

WORKPIECE

COORDINATE

AT

INPUT"

Fig.

TV

"WORK

OPERATION.

2.37

Tn

TOOL

POSITION

CURRENT

BY

DISPLAY

Xtn/2

SYSTEM"

MEASURED

IDF

SI

(SKI

SET

vr

I

INDICATH1

POSITION

(0,0)

NOTE

BY

VALUE

111

1)

to

(2)

a.

Work

G50

Using

system

the

following

coordinate

TOD

A A

TIL

command,

this

for

each

system

Specifies

(00

Specifies

memory

of

work

setting

50)

to

number

set

X-axis

coordinate

tool

the

offset

coordinate

and

(G50T)

(51

Z-axis

system

number

80)

to

with

setting

value:

Work

coordinate

system

setting

value

Content

of

programmed

coordinate

one

1:

"Unit

which

Note

the

(EXTERNAL)

tion

display

tool

memory

current

is

screen

(POS)

=

shown

on

Unit

position

(Note

Content

+

programmed

offset

position

in

of

the

CRT

current

value

1)

of

memory

value"

"POSITION

current

display.

+

tool

is

posi¬

58

"00"

a

in

given

work

in

field

specifies

contents

the

memory

the

unit

coordinate

is

tool

the

AA.

the

system

being

specified

is

position

current

set

offset

work

setting

of

tool

zero.

(for

system

correctly

with

posi¬

as

51

52

80

01

02

30

b.

Usually,

number

EXAMPLE:

G50

specify

specification

T5100

T

;

"00"

coordinate

above

-x,

the

:

with

offset

at

-2

,

the

operator

program

It

ory

Xln

assumed

is

contains

and

Ztn

that

the

for

the

following

tool

each

tool

coordinate

Tn.

d.

mem¬

data

When

the

tool

the

slide

example,

tion

display)

defined

shown

by

below

G50

c.

By

set

This

coordinate

the

and

by

(3)

Return

a.

By

point

current

X-axis

With

b.

coordinate

start

(0,

command

point

G51

c.

a

NOTES:

G50

1.

are

2.

When

#6005D5

display

3.

G51

two

Consequently,

command,

together

setting

+X

T0000

this

with

means

content

the

G51

a

0)

command

single

T

valid

this

;

block

G50

GOO

at

command

Zt>

T

COORDINATE

WORK

,

command,

unit

the

that

system

of

content

specification

to

current

,

command,

rapid

position

and

Z-axis.

part

program

system

point

is

in

principle.

facilitates

(0,

0)

after

block

and

G51

only

function

(G50

to

0

off)

is

commands.

T0000

X0

Z0

the

with

the

tool

T1

AT

(-x,

z

—

Fig.

current

the

tool

of

traverse

value

the

should

basis.

are

the

for

preset

.

equivalent

is

;

:

after

tool

work

the

offset

WHEN

TOOL

A

GIVEN

-r).

iTTT

*\

!

WHEN

M..*

AT

~x

/

2

Xn/2

(-x/2)

x)

(

+Ztt

—

SYSTEM

2.38

the

coordinate

canceling

setting

coordinate tool

offset

T0000.

of

position

tool

is

rate

is

that

setting,

current

Hence,

the

return

completion

always

nonmodal

specified

is

used,

of

execution

the

offset

number

coordinate

number

___

IS

SLIDE

POSITION

J

TOOL

POSITION

-t-Xu/2

position

of

is

performed

memory

origin

returned

where

(0,

0),

uses

work

the

position

the

of

be

codes

G

blocks.

set

POS-EXTERNAL

the

to

IS

SLIDE

0)

(0,

+Z

COORDINATE SYSTEM SET THESE

system

value.

work

the

(G51)

to

the

on

both

machining

value

of

use

start

the

to

machining.

specified

which

parameter

following

this

of

cancelled

is

=

IS

WITH

VALUES.

is

with

"0"

the

unit

G51

on

4.

5.

6.

When

ting

System

The

work

rent

is

It

The

cannot

EXAMPLE

(The

(0,

G50

Nl

N

2

GOO

(Machining

20

N

N21

N

22

(Machinig

40

N

Note

and

compensation

during

may

taper

the

is

performed,

Shift"

current

coordinate

position

not

shown

work

be

start

0))

T5100

T0101

X*

GOO

50

T5200

G

T0202

GOO

51

G

1:

T0202

machining,

also

machining.

+

x

G50

work

T

is

position

system

value

in

coordinate

cancelled

A:

point

;

-

M03

by

tool

•

Z-

;

tool

by

;

tool

The

commands

for

used

be

TO:

i

MI

&JJ

\

N20

WOW

HACHINSNC

UA

COOKHAAU

coordinate

”2.6.5,

valid.

made

of

"POSITION

POSITION

system

by

current

is

Work

setting

S100

Selection

(Note

No.

_

•

:

-

No.

Return

display

position

may

wear.

tool

the

for

r

—

r

TO:

COORDINATE

tl

IL

KAWU

mill

SYSTEM

Work

tool

the

is

shown

EXTERNAL.

set

reset

a

position

coordinate

for

;

1)

.

01)

Positioning

point.

coordinate

Work

tem

setting

02.

No.

Selection

02

No.

02)

current

to

0)

(

,

0

offset

be

position

tool

compensation

Tnl'V

CURRENT

\

1

DISPLAY

N

2

STSTIM

N.,

O!,

TOOI

I'S

IMIS

system

Coordinate

in

ABSOLUTE."

by

operation.

tool

of

(Note

.

used

When

\

0}

system,

"00."

to

in

tool

of

in

l’0»]JUJh

(U,

the

set

the

cur¬

T

G50

display

system

No.

a

to

for

tool

1)

.

position

101

TO

the

for

specified

offset

U)

set¬

01.

01

given

sys¬

for

59

2.8.23

(C50T.

WORK

51

C

NOTES

COORDINATE

)

.

MULTI-SHIFT

N

N2

1

50

G

GOO

5100

T

T0101

;

M03

S1000

.

EXAMPLE

If

following

program

tool

correctly

tion

N

A')

N

I

WORK

t

OORDTNAT*

.VSItM

This

at

ting

work

approach

the

.

1

2

3

4

+x

!

point

X

Z

machining

program

is

the

to

T5100

G50

G0101

S150

G96

X20.

GOO

B

A

APPROACH

TOOL

because

is

B

with

coordinate

(-20.)

=

(-27.5)

=

B.

which

is

interrupted

restarted

machining

moves

without

start

to

the

;

.

;

M03

STARTED

OF

CURRENT

DISPLAY

,

AT

INTERRUPTION

MACHINING

Z2.5

PROGRAM POSITION POSITION

AFTER

HACHININC

-

TJC1™

-

P80

COORDINATE

b

IX

performs

the

following

position

POSITION

-

(80.)

+

N1

MEMORY

60

40

G50

coordinate

system,

A

unchanged:

(40.)

(20

=

was

first

THE

(-20

,-27.5)

CURRENT

0)

(0,

,

1

T5100

values

thus

60.

12.5

=

started

returning

point

approach

START POSITION

S)

system

to

keeping

by

and

,

the

POSITION

DISPLAY

;

command

retain

the

tool

posi¬

set¬

the

(Machined

N25

26

N

N27

r-

28

N

N48

The

by

x

=

Z

=

+x

Z=-L-l

ksz

TOOOO

X-50.

GOO

G50

T5200 T02020

GOO

(Machining

;

G51

coordinate

this

command

(-so.)

(-35.)

110

T02

+

by

,

••

40.

D1A

by

no.

100

T01)

Z-35.

Tool

of

display

;

M03

T02)

system

are

=

TQ2

/

f

A—

47.5

DIA

-35.

701

replacement

T02

S800

setting

as

60.

5.

Pi

Q

.

-*TOI

;

current

is

(-50,

follows:

r*

-so.

/

position

-35)

;

values

MACHINING

POSITION

I

CURRENT

DISPLAY

2

position

.

START

-

POSITION

(0,

0)

60

EXAMPLE

This

example

replacement

each

from

coordinate

No.

51

52

C.

other,

Too!

shows

position

system

Coordinate

100.

110.

X

and

setting

program

a

of

each

the

tool

values

.

Memory

for

Z

47.5

40.

which

different

is

work

the

X-60.

DIA

WORK

COORDINATE

+Z

SYSTEM

2.8.24

Special

or

user

registered

programs

command

These

user

macro

in

the

Main

USER

programs

the

by

in

can

to

execute

special

body,

same

format

Program

MACRO

written

use

the

part

be

called

programs

which

of

them.

as

a

(C65

AND

the

by

group

program

the

by

are

can

be

subprogram

User

C66)

machine

of

instructions

memory.

use

of

referred

written

Macro

programs

called

in

this

body

or,

in

calling

makes

to

the

user

is

simply,

the

a

user

it

vari¬

macro

that

pro¬

sometimes

following

the

"macro

Macro

body

designation"

main

the

real

the

This

of

specific

user

program"

Call

may

program

numbers

enables

macro

Commands

be

"argument

The

G65

builder

These

or

to

and

are

G66

as

the

stored

macro

possible

ables

to

run

vide

this

In

referred

macro

"

in

tool

body

to

assign

the

series

a

as

movements.

manual,

as

to

.

"

from

body.

.

User

macro

manners

:

Body

2.8.24.1

user

A

five

r

G65

P9001

(Argument

Designation)

)

Main

Program

M98

P

However,

.

allows

(1)

Use

(2)

Computation

constants.

(3)

Use

branch.

al

These

to

provide

complicated

1234

of

variables.

of

control

features

a

computations

,

;

unlike

between

commands

enable

generalized

Variable

Operation

Control

M99

Subprogram

01234

M99

a

subprogram,

variables

the

program

and

1

Command

;

a

or

as

such

macro

user

that

decisions.

Command

user

macro

between

a

condition¬

body

requires

No.

(

1)

G65

The

1

2

3

4

5

Type

Simple

Modal

Call

G

Call Call

Simple

•

P

macro

specified

default

The

argument

of

an

specify

it

designation"

the

"local

details,

(2)

Modal

G66

P..-

This

command

by

program

is

mand

.

times

;

G67

command

This

call

by

code

by

Call

•

L-

program,

P,

by

value

in

(argument

is

variables"

see

3

Call

L-**

number

executed,

of

Call

arbitrary

M

code

T

code

(G65)

•

(argument

is

called

of

to

the

assignment

ARGUMENT

3

(G66

(argument

the

calls

the

cancels

Code

G65

G66

Gxx

Mxx

T

whose

and

is

L

user

designation).

used

G67)

and

macro

P.

Each

specified

the

G67.

4

xxxx

designation''

program

executed

is

When

1.

macro

of

in

user

the

DESIGNATION.

designation)

subroutine

time

macro

modal

call

Remarks

digits

number

the

desired,

is

real

a

move

mode.

For

cancel.

max.

;

times.

L

designation

"Argument

numbers

macro.

,

specified

com¬

is

run

was

to

For

L

61

2.8.24.1

User

Macro

Call

Commands

(Cont'd)

(5)

Macro

Cal]

by

T

Code

(3)

Macro

(arc

MX

G

This

provides

P...

m»5

ten

G

designated

macro

The these

#t>120

program

#ol21

ptogram

\

#>129

program

NOTE:

single

only

was

called

or

code

T

arbitrary

(4)

Macro

• •

G

codes

G

codes

•

Macro

X

number

Call

by

ament

the

(argument

of

C01

NC

by

program

are

Sets

G

Sets

G

Sets

call

nesting.

for

by

does

code.

Call

•

Z

Arbitary

designation)

command

designation)

through

maker

numbers

follows:

as

code

which

09010.

which

code

09011

which

code

9019.

0

by

arbitrary

Namely,

using

not

permit

Code

by

M

•

Mxx

G

with

can

arbitrary

another

;

Code

;

G199

be

which

calls

the

is

equivalent

;.

For

excluding

set

by

correspond

the

G

code

macro

code,

G

macro

Gxx,

parameter.

macro

permits

which

call

those

M

of

code,

by

the

All

T

code

commands

provide

a

macro

call

coir

mand

•

G

X-1'

•

*

•

Z

T

xxxx

;

to

this

09000

same

call

parameter-

command,

is

executed

block

of

Whether

command

No.

T

is

code

a

macro

the

after

completed.

and

code

T

be

may

of

the

TF

signal

to

is

specified

program

move

be

used

by

num*-

command

is

not

a

as

the

per¬

fol¬

With

ber

in

the

to

Transmission

formed.

macro

lowing

Parameter

#6134

•

0

•

T

code

•

T

1

call

number

When

command

decimal

to

common

MENT

,

variable

DESIGNATION

PERMITTED.

macro

bitrary

be

subroutine

G

processed

code

command

a

T

the

4

digits)

code

designation

09000

is

code

value

becomes

#149.

When

that

or

by

like

a

designated

OTHER

a

normal

to

call

specified

NOTE

code

T

has

been

a

macro

is

the

T

handled

THAT

THAN

is

M

code.

as

macro

as

macro

a

by

T

"xxxx"

argument

THE

THIS

programmed

called

code,

or

T

as

of

by

a

T

cod

a

macro

progran

call

(up

of

ARGU¬

IS

NOT

m

an

ar¬

it

a

wil

command

This

macro

is

completed

transmitted.

ignated

M30,

M90

-ÿj

no

program

sol

31

program

•

32

ml

program

ml

33

procram

NOTE

DOES

macro

bitrary

bo

THAT

NOT

When

subroutine

processed

executed

in

parameter

by

through

Sets

number

Sets

number

Sets

number

Sets

number

PERMIT

macro

a

code

G

may

that

For

M

THE

like

call

after

block.

Mxx,

M99.

code

09001.

code

09002.

code

09003

code

09004.

MACRO

ARGUMENT

M

that

or

by

normal

a

macros.

the

four

excluding

which

code

has

macro

a

move

and

MF

codes

M

calls

CALL

is

programmed

been

M

code.

M

this

codes

may

M01,

macro

M

case,

is

are

be

M02,

CODE

In

command

M

MOO,

the

BY

DESIGNATION.

a

in

an

called

or

by

code,

T

it

des¬

of

the

not

ar¬

will

(6)

a.

As

gram,

user

simple

call

code,

G

b.

In

modal

ecuted,

also

called

tially

Multiple

G65

Simple

a

subprogram

a

user

macro.

call

is

disabled

or

Multiple

call,

the

valid

by

multiple

executed

Call

macro

Quadruple

and

M

code

Call

each

designated

for

the

Call

is

modal

for

by

move

call.

from

And

called

may

the

or

time

call

macro

T

G66

macro

command

the

G66

Modal

from

be

called

nesting

combined.

code.

Modal

a

move

The

macros

one

designated

another

is

call

Call

command

is

run.

in

Call

from

permitted

Multiple

by

arbitrary

the

are

subpro¬

another

is

This

macro

sequen¬

latest.

for

ex¬

is

62

Sample

Program

the

For

designated,

address

the

in

which

command

no

may

argument

be

omitted.

need

be

66

P9400

C

X10.

COO

P9500

G66

Z20.

COO

;

G67

;

G67 COO

Z30.

09400

X40

COO

Z50.

COO

,

M99

09500

X60.

GOO

Z70

COO

_

M99

.

above

The

following

®-©ÿ®

2.8.

Argument

variable

designation,

real

of

quired

(1)

Argument

cept

between

the

2

2#.

values

type

.

Argument

for

variables

Argument

;

,

;

,

;

.

,

;

,

sample

order:

Argument

is

used

to

I

and

may

L,

G,

the

Address

,

©

©J

©

I

program

*©-©-©

the

real

the

in

therefore,

variables.

type

Designation

designated

be

N,

O,

argument

as

are

of

Designation

A

B

C

D

E

F

H

I

J

K

M

Q

R

S

T

U

V W

X

Y

Z

Main

Macro

Designation

value

macro

user

is

which

and

Argument

P.

II,

designation

shown

I

is

to

the

I

below.

U*er

Program

executed

can

in

-*©-©

assigned

be

body.

of

act

designation

selected

be

any

The

relationships

addresses

Variable

Macro

«1

#2

#3

#7

*8

#9

#11

#4 #5

#6

#13

#17

#18 #19

#20

121

#22

#23

#24 #25

#26

the

in

+®

Argument

assigning

address

in

Body

Sample

Program

#1

#2

#24

#26

t

C65

P9100

L3

A30

B60

X34.8

Argument

Z50.2

Part

(2)

Argument

A,

B,

and

K

arguments

be

must

ships

es

between

and

Argument

designated

the

-©

to

a

is

as

re¬

ex¬

and

The

suffixes

termined

combinations.

K

and

For

the

be

designated,

C

arguments

may

variables

Address

Designation

A

B

C

Il

Jl

*1

12

J

K2

13

J3

*3

14

J

X4

15

J5

K5

16

J6

K6

17

J

K7

18

JB

KB

1»

J9

Kg

IlO

•I

K

the

by

address

Designation

be

in

the

argument

of

2

4

7

10

1

through

order

command

the

I

10

and

designated.

order.

this

as

are

in

11

10

of

which

shown

User

to

the

sets

I,

designation

below.

V

ariables

Macro

#1

*2

#3

#4

#5

#6

#7

#8

#9

*10

#11

#12

#13

#14

#15

#16

#17 #18

#19

#20

#21

#22 #23

#24

#25

#26

#27

#28

#29 #30

#31

#32 #33

J,

I,

designated

no

argument

be

may

,

Designation

1,

of

J,

and

relation¬

The

address¬

in

Body

K

and

omitted.

J,

I,

are

and

K

de¬

J,

need

63

2.8-24.2

Argument

Designation

(Cont'd)

2.8.24.3

Overview

Of

User

Macro

Body

G

(3)

An

sign

out

as

65

Program

P9005

Position

argument

and

decimal

shown

Argument

A,

D.

£

(In

F

(In

F

J

!

.

M.

o

K

,

L

\

A

decimal

point,

on

Address

B

H

G99

98

G

,

K

.

T

S.

\

.

2

'i

B

of

Decimal

may

generally

point.

in

Designation

mode)

modi

C

Argument

the

page.

)

#4

+

•

I

•

Point

For

position

#5

#6

+

J

•

K

Designation

in

Argument

be

designated

the

designation

decimal

of

Metric

Input

3

0

4

2

0

(2)

3

0

(2)

3

(2)

3

(2)

3

user

A

#7

#9

t

••

•

I

K

Part

bination

(1)

a.

b

c

with

point

a

with¬

is

(2)

a.

b.

Inch

Input

3

0

6

4

2

4

0

4

(3)

3)

(

a

b.

quires

judgements

Hence,

programming

from

subprogram

and

Described mentioned

2.8.24.4

macro

of

Variables

Local

variable

Common

System

Operation

Arithmetical

Functional

Control

Branch

Repeat

Using

these

complicated

the

a

simple

the

storing

below

above.

Variables

body

the

following

variable

Commands

operations

Commands

command

commands,

may

be

feature

the

of

machining

to

a

special,

of

are

is

programmed

(#1

through

(#100

(

#1000

(IF

(WHILE

operations

written

of

user

wide

these

details

commands.

through

(+,

(SIN,

qualification)

<(

GO

TO

m)

DO

a

in

macro

range

cycle

complicated

cycles

of

using

#33)

#549) #5104)

*.

•••)

/.

ROUND,-

.

COS,

n)

((qualification)

program

and

the

of

which

conditional

general

enable

to

is

NC

functions

rather

is

canned

the

in

the

machine.

commands

the

format.

com¬

••)

re¬

the

a

cycle

ts

counted

•

value

dibits

amoter

p.c

(4)

a.

Argument

st_

cl

LI

designated

b.

K

should

addresses

c.

In

sien

the

of

d.

In

.dw.tys,

ii.it

ion

(.

Lode

£4

1

he

value

from

in

nircnlhiics

follows

tnat

#600G-D5

Considerations

concurrently

twice,

For

both

types

be

designated

may

the

argument

and

decimal

address

G65

and

be

specified

This

holds

shows

the

least

decimal

=

in

designation

If

the

I

be

designated

designation

point

blocks,

GG6

before

true

the

position

indicates

1.

Argument

the

last

I,

and

in

may

with

significant

the

at

point

Designation

same

one

I

variable

is

types

addresses

order.

this

in

any

part,

be

used

and

G65

each

argument

the

of

decimal

digit.

number

the

time

U

and

validated.

I,

The

order.

negative

regardless

G66

macro

may

has

J,

should

desig-

call

point

The

of

other

by

be

been

and

Instead

ress

of

a

in

user

designated

called

is

address

variable,

Each

assigned

macro

(1)

A

macro

is

fetched

There

is

To

Local

local

used,

during

value.

common

identified

the

using

call

variable

locally,

the

independently

Certain

tion,

values

and

retained

directly

macro

a

by

execution,

the

from

three

are

local

the

command

Variables

That

variable

allocated

are

the

results

assigning

variable.

variable

types

variable,

by

variables,

argument

by

(#1

the

is

is,

stored

body,

variable

a

G65

one

when

area

of

a

the

When

the

corresponding

area

of

variables:

and

real

designation

or

through

that

the

(

#1

through

for

each

argument

by

operations

value

address

this

to

system

number.

numbers

G6b.

#33)

used

is

local

macro

to

variable

provide

variable

#33)

macro

in

add¬

an

may

value

local

variable.

can

part

for

each

is

call,

designa¬

be

is

the

be

of

are

Main

Program

Single-level

Macro

Double-level

Macro

Hence,

same

called.

is

macro

nation.

"blank."

at

the

(2)

Common

throuth

common

A

through

and

is,

the

to

the

macro

call

time

#549)

common

results

G65

the

assume

Each

and

The

Each

of

Variables

variable

Common

P9201

A-

••

Argument

Designation

variables

different

local

is

registered

variable

local

power-on

may

macros

all

variable

obtained

Variable

•

B-

variable

not

variable

and

(#100

be

of

enables

by

;

C-

••

#2,

#1,

values

is

by

argument

designated

set

is

reset

through

shared

all

nesting

another

Area

#3,

each

reset

becomes

to

operations.

all

by

levels.

macro

a

macro.

"Read/writÿ

Enabled

Local

for

time

each

for

desig¬

"blank"

#149,

macros

to

09201

'

P9205

C65

A-

#1

••

=

•

#2

=

••

#3

=

variable

single-level

the

it

#500

That

refer

#1.

•

;

#2,

•B-•

a.

are

operations

trols

parameter

#3

•

C-

area

macro

#100

cleared

,

they

b.

#500

are

not

operations.

The

without

user

designated

they

can

G65

P9008

;

•

through

at

and

are

#6008D1

through

cleared

common

by

be

09205

Local

for

#149:

the

time

set

are

not

cleared

is

#549:

the

at

variables

restrictions.

arguments.

designated

;

•

A-

;

#1

#2

#3

Read

Enabled

•

#1

#2

#3

•

=

•

=

••

=

variable

duplicate-level

These

of

power-on

to

"blank."

by

1.

at

set

These

of

time

are

They

Indirectly,

as

follows.

09008

#100

/write

area

common

In

reset

common

powe-on

available

cannot

#1

=

macro

variables

reset

and

some

operation

variables

and

to

be

however,

con¬

if

reset

the

Single-nest

Macro

Common

two

types

OK

variables

depending

#100

)

#149

OK

Double-nest

Macro

are

divided

on

#500

i

#549

Tripple-nest

clear

OK

Macro

the

into

conditions:

Quadruple-

nest

following

OK

Macro

(3)

system

A

the

to

tem

a.

#1015,

b.

#1115,

System

system.

variables

Interface

#1032T

Interface

#1132+

Variables

variable

:

input

output

Argument

is

the

There

signals

Designation

one

are

following

whose

...

#1000

#1100

use

types

through

#1

of

is

of

through

unique

sys¬

65

2.8.24.4

Variables

(Cont'd)

YASN

AC

c.

Tool

tool

and

through

#2051

through

through d.

Alarm

Clock

e.

f.

Single-block

completion

g.

Feed-hold

control

h.

lenturc)

I.

]ÿ

...

RS232C

.

Modal

Positional

#5102

Note:

a.

specifications

tails

and

The

of

The

b.

the

offset

wear

#2150,

#2199,

amount,

amount

#2080,

message

#3001,

...

control

wait

feedrate-override,

#3004

data

information

interface

may

not

of

following

variables

#2151

#2201

display

stop

output

be

the

paragraphs

tool

...

#2001

#2081

through

#3002

and

auxiliary

...

,

.

...

#4001

...

input

installed.

machine

mentioned

coordinate

through

#2180,

#2250

...

#3000

#3003

#3100

through

#5001

and

output

tool

describe

above.

#2099,

-function

and

(print

through

Follow

builder.

data.

#2050,

#2101

#2181

exact-stop

out

#4120

signals

the

de¬

-o

o

o o o.

o

-o

o

o o

o

-o

o

2C

D

21

D

22

D

23

2"

D

2s

D

26

27

D

2e

D

29

D

0

Q

21

1

21

2

1

2

of

213

21*

1

2

D

*

D

UI0 UI1

UI2

UI3

UI4

UI5

UI6

UI7

UI8

UI9 UI10

uin

U112

UI13

UI14

UI15

a.

Intervace

#1032)+

When

l.

through

of

side

•

tate

input

the

input

shown

#1007

LT7

27

#1015

15

IT

1

2

an

of

signals

below.

#1006

#1014

5

one

#1015,

operational

each

signals

UI6

26

Ul

4

1

4

1

2

anable

V

Input

of

is

#1005

#1013

UI1

213

alue

1

0

Signals

the

system

is

specified

expression,

user-macro-dedicated

read.

and

The

the

#1004

UI5

UI4

5

2

3

2“

#1012

UI1

2

212

Input

Contact Contact

(#1000

variables,

to

relationships

system

#1003

UI3

23

#1011

UI11

211

the

#1002

UI2

22

#1010

UI10

21#

Signal

Closed

Open

Through

right-hand

on

the

16-pomt

variables

#1001

UI1

1

2

#1009

U1

1

9

2

#1000

/off

between

#1000

UI0

#1008

UI18

9

2

#1015,

are

2°

B

as

read

Each ciated

regardless

When

li.

the

input

of

18

points

decimal

#1032

Sample

IF

2*5

Bit

made

is

#130

2ÿ

Bits

tively

decimal

as

a

Note:

not

be

expressions.

variable

contact

system

signals

positive

=

Program

[

#1015

(UI15)

to

sequence

#1032

=

through

read

System

placed

is

the

of

(16

Z5#

i

=0

EQ

is

to

be

positive

variables

to

is

1.

"closed"

system

unit

variable

(UI0

bits)

through

are

value.

O

read

AND

2ÿ

stored

the

«ÿ

]

GO

and,

number

255

(UI0

value.

left-hand

[lOOO

0

or

#1032

collectively

2i

i]

*

TO

if

N100.

through

common

in

#1000

0.0

"open"

of

the

is

UI

100;

is

it

through

side

when

respectively,

machine.

designated,

15)

that

read

"0,"

UI7)

are

variable

of

operational

the

consist

as

branch

a

collec¬

#1032

asso¬

a

#130

can¬

66

Interface

b.

#1115,

i.

When

is

#1115

operational

to

sent

output output

shown

signals.

signals

below:

#1107

U07

7

2

#1115

U15

2is

YASNAC

2°

22

23

2“

25

26

#1132)+

one

specified

expression,

of

each

//1

106

U06

6

2

#1114

U14

u

1

2

Variable

Output

of

system

the

The

and

#1105

U05

2s

#1113

U1

3

21J

Value

1

0

o-

Cb

o-

Signals

{#1100

variables

to

the

left-hand

an

user-macro-dedicated

relationships

the

system

#1104

U04

2"

#1

112

U12

2

1

2

on

#1

103

U03

J

2

#1111

1

U1

2n

Output

Contact

or

variables

#1

U02

#1110

U10

2

Contact

UOO

UOl

U02

U03

U04

U05

UOfe

2

1

off

102

2

0

Through

#1100

side

signal

between

#1

U01

2

#1109

U09

2*

Signal

Closed

Open

through

of

16-point

are

101

1

an

can

the

as

#1100

UOO

2°

#1108

U08

2*

be

When

n.

output

of

16

points

At

this

#1132

in

value.

#1132

With

iii.

value

the

of

them

operational

Considerations

iv.

When

any

stituted

through

"Blank"

Values

"1."

be

Sample

#1107

output

The

contact

the

T/1132

The

output

through

contents

the

output

the

through

(Decimal

system

signals

time,

output

is

=

system

sent

is

written

values

into

#1115,

assumed

is

other

Program

#10

=

(#1132

=

U07)

U03).

240

(UOO

(16

the

#

Z

0

i

=

last

expression,

one

the

than

t

signal

(closed)

signal

are

local

of

signals

11110000

=

variable

through

bits)

are

decimal

in

the

[llOO

variables

retained.

is

the

to

other

of

the

values

be

to

"blank"

=

of

bit

6tate.

AND

bits

of

outputted

variable

of

bits

1.5)

240)

(#10

#1132

collectively

positive

form

2i

i]

*

#1100

right-hand

value

its

1.0

than

system

are

"0."

and

(UG7)

7?

OR

2ÿ

Binary

is

U015)

of

binary

through

Hence,

or

variables,

handled

0

arc

(#8

through

without

are

#8

throuch

15

specified,

that

output.

value

side

is

read.

0.0

assumed

is

outputted

AND

change

outputted

00001111)

=

consist

substituted

16-bit

#1132,

when

of

are

sub¬

#J

as

follows:

151

2ÿ

(1104

2ÿ

(UOO

the

one

an

IOU

to

in

and

to

V

2»

21°

21

21J

2n

2lk

1

2

When

thuuiuh

output

1

5

1.0

in

or

Mil1',

the

o

o-

o

0.0

\losed

the

are

usso.

U07

U08

U09

UOIO

UOll

UO

12

U013

UO

14

U015

substituted

luted

or

open'

output

state.

in

any

contact

of

#1100

s

.

c

Tool

Data,

#2001

#2101

#2201

l.

When

through

an

of

amount,

amount

The

ii.

numbers

below

Offset

Wear

Tool

#2050,

-

#2150,

-

#2250

-

one

#2250

operational

tool

can

be

relationships

and

:

Amount

#2051

#2151

of

the

is

specified

expression,

coordinate

read.

the

system

And

-

system

between

Tool

#2080,

#2180,

variable

to

data,

variables

the

the and

the

Coordinate

#2081

#2181

#2001

right-hand

tool

oL.&el

tool

arc

#2099,

-

#2199,

-

wear

offset

as

side

shown

67

2.8.24.4

variables

(Cont'd)

d.

Alarm

Message

Display

(#3000)

in

x

re

X

i/i

x

rt

I

N

IA

«

2

3

TJ

O

rt

—

O

OS

H

w

x

re

J

x

10

x

rt

i

N

System

Variable

#2001

to

#2050

#2101

to

#2150

#2201

to

#2250

System

Variable

#2051

to

#2080 #2151

to

#2180

Offset

Tool

Memory

01

to

50 01

to

50

01

to

50

Tool

Coordinate

Memory

51

to

80

51

to

80

No.

macro

#3000

a

program,

this

than

number

When

specified

l.

Using

(less

alarm

control-out

three

be

.

chine

When

u.

"A/B"

or

screen

Its

message

:

tion

Press

The

the

ALM

alarm

bottom

ALARM

condition

to

put

(<alarm

n

=

command,

characters)

32

n

symbols.

digits

this

is

displayed

regardless

can

function

number

CRT

of

to

system

the

and

#3000

be

machine

message

specify

enclosed

The

not

command

of

the

seen

key.

and

screen.

alarmed

variable

preceded

alarm

one

be

the

on

mode

by

message

occurs

in

>);

the

with

used

is bottom

and

the

09100

#3000

the

alarm

by

control-in

number

by

executed,

of

function.

following

displayed

and

0054

N

in

user

a

may

be

state.

message

a

3-digit

should

the

ma¬

"ALM"

CRT

opera¬

and

on

in.

When

specified

expression,

Sample

#116

contents

The

substituted

are

#2081

tool

The

is

erased

are

set.

113

x

re

1

x

re

N

one

to

the

its

Programs

#2016

=

#24

=

wear

and

System

Variable

#2081

#2099 #2181 #2199

of

the

left-hand

value

:

of

tool

for

;

amount

the

to

above

can

offset

common

(memory

contents

system

side

be

number

variable

of

Tool

Wear

Amount

Memory

81

to

99

81

to

99

of

an

changed.

No.

local

No.

variables

operational

for

16

#116.

81)

of

variable

is

X-axis

#24

USERS

550:

When

cause

state

Sample

#3000

MESSAGE

MACRO

RESET

alarm,

of

be

can

Program

=

Message

sample

key

cleared.

(MACRO

550

FLOW)

ERROR.

display

pressed

is

message

the

DATA

"ALM”

area

ERROR:

OVERFLOW

and

after

display

DATA

removal

and

of

the

OVER¬

t

the

alarm

68

.

Clock

.

When

s

specified,

System

Variable

#3001

#3002

i.

his

.he

Sample

#3001

ii. The

Type

Clock

preset

To

system

expression.

Program

=

Restrictions

accuracy

4294968000

iccrus,

The

429496800

occurs,

Sample

Main

G65

setting

accuracy

setting

Program

P9351

(#3001,

system

the

variable

,

0

of

msec

of

sec

T5

1

2

the

has

#3002)

variable

clock

Unit

1

The

clock

has

the

clock

the

,

ms

s

clock,

put

been

clock

been

clock

#3001

can

be

At

Power-On

Reset

Same

power-off

time

substitute

the

at

clock

8

is

1

reached,

to

8

is

2

reached,

to

Argument

variable

of

•

Macro

3

read.

to

as

left-hand

is

preset

ms.

"0,"

ms.

"0."

seconds

or

#3002

Condition

"0"

Always

When

signal

the

When

and

When

overflow

an

designation

#20

to

wait

Count

value

to

value

overflow

for

side

for

STL

is

clock

on

with

of

"0."

When

distribution

this

In

with

the

not

is

FIN

#3003

Feed-Hold,

g*

tioning

When

the

substituted

feedrate

can

be

#3004

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Sample

finish

the

end

case,

Completion

made

check

waited

auxiliary

0

1

2

3

value

in

override,

Feed

Valid

Invalid

Valid

Invalid

V

alid

Invalid

Valid

Invalid

Program

the

Block

system

valid

Hold

(DEN)

waited

is

careful

be

.

in

the

variable

positioning

invalid.

Feedrate

Override

Valid

Invalid

V

alid

V

alid

Invalid

is

signal

FIN

cleared.

skip

for,

function.

Single

Switch

Valid

Invalid

Valid

Invalid

Feedrate-Override,

Control

listed

and

or

not

waited

is

not

for

Hence,

not

FIN

Waited

Not

(#3004)

following

#3004,

Vosilioning

Completion

for,

transmitted.

in

the

when

to

specify

Signal

mod

*

waited

And

Posi¬

table

feed

completion

Valid

V

alid

Valid

alid

ln\

Invalid Invalid

In

valid

the

block

the

is

hold,

09351

#3002

WHILE

END

M99

Single

Program

=

1

,

the

Macro

f.

Completion

When

substituted

switch

block

may

be

of

tion

the

finish

(MST)

;

0

[#3002

,

Block

Wait

value

in

entered

.

GE

Stop

Control

listed

system

can

without

signal

#1

be

[

D01

And

(#3003)

the

in

variable

disabled

waiting

(FIN)

,

Auxiliary

following

#3003,

or

of

the

Function

the

for

auxiliary

table

the

block

checking

is

single

func¬

Special

Command)

Macro

G65

Threadcutting

+X

r

i

-1-

L

~*i'\

HK(-

O

Call

P9093

U--

Cycle

(Incremental

G5<3

THREAD-

i

P-

I'UTTtfiC

I

K

—

w-

•

W

K-

•

F-

----

:

#6

—

#23:

—

#21:

—

Negative

value

Negative

value,

;

•

#9:

Without

radius

U-/2

I

+z

Lead

sign

value

diameter

,

69

2.8.24.4

Macro

09093 M93

#10 #11

#12

#3003

GOO

#3004

G22

32

C

G

32

#3004

GOO

#3003

M

92

M

99

RS232C

h.

When

NC

and

equipment

face.

above

the

Output

i

.

Program

.

;

-

ROUND

=

ROUND

=

ROUND

=

U#ll

=

U-#10

W

#12

U#10

=

U-#ll

W-#23

=

,

;

system

interna!

If

variables

[#6]

[#21] [#23]

;

1

-

;

7

-

W-#6

,

W-

#6

0

;

-

,

;

0

-

Data

variable

RS232C

via

external

the

information

Mcassages

of

F#9

;

Output

data

{Cont'd)

;

*2

+#10

,

(#3100)

#3100

can

data

equipment

is

Buffering

;

Single

invalidated

specified,

is

outputted

be

input/output

printed.

block

rFeed

lidated

Feedrate

ride

Positioning

pleted

-

is

a

printer,

4

blocks

switch

hold

inva¬

over¬

invalidated

com-

messages

to

external

inter¬

in.

The

above

variable

It

is

the

RS232C

use

Sample

#3100

required,

external

interface

the

interface.

Program

(

=

(TOOL

=

(

=

#3100

LJ

#3100=#2001 #3100=#2101

#3100

Printout

l.

#4120

specified

can

times tion

#2201

=

(

=

Data

TOOL

X

uu

10.

Two

—

decimal

Modal

When

is

be

called

Information

one

specified,

up

known.

commands.

output

is

therefore,

equipment

)

;

OFFSET

*

LJ

;

,

;

)

;

OFFSET

OQOuu

spaces

of

to

the

These

current

the

executed

and

preset

Carriage

uu

•

X

•

10.000

••

=

-10.000

=

•

0.

=

01

-

precede

eight-digit

(

#4001

system

the

immediately

is

performed

in

to

such

01);

ZLJLJ

••

800

z

lO.OOOuu

variables

modal

values

macro

the

previously

a

as

printer

the

parameters

return/line

••

•

R

ram

mm

ram

R

the

signed

data.

Through

#4001

commands

preceding

commands

of

modal

when

)

;

0.800

#4120)

system

program.

attach

via

feed

through

are

that

block

are

some¬

informa¬

that

#3100

When

enclosed

via

(Carriage

#3100

which

.

n

#3100

When

local

ble

RS232C

70

«Viessage>)

=

this

by

RS232C

Each

( )

-

useful

is

Output

=

this

variable,

the

at

interface

command

control-in

interface.

output

Return

is

of

Data

command

common

right-hand

is

message

/Line

specified,

in

tabulating

}>

is

as

signed

specified,

control-out

and

followed

is

Feed).

only

specified,

variable,

side

is

decimal

the

Hence,

CR/LF

punched

the

or

outputted

message

is

CR/LF

by

when

is

value

system

via

8-digit

outputted,

data.

of

the

varia¬

data.

System

Variable

#4001

S

#4021

#4108

#4109 #4113

#4114

#4115

#4119

#4120

Modal

G

code

G

E

code

F

code

M

code

Sequence

Program

S

code

T

code

Information

(group

number

01)

21)

ii

#4001

left-hand

Sample

Main

Program

G65

Macro

09602

#1

=

GOO

G01

G03 GOO

G

#1

99

M

through

side

Program

P9602

Program

;

#4001

X

2-

••

X-

•

2

•

.

-

,

to

the

System

Variable

#5061

#5062

#5081

Positional

X-axis

position

2-axis

position

X-axis

Information

skip

(ABSKP)

skip

(ABSKP)

tool

offset

signal

Read

Enabled

During

Move

(

Note)

of

#4120

the

cannot

operation

Designationÿ

placed

be

expression.

;

amount

offset

#5082

Z-axis

tool

amount

(

position

#5101

X-axis deflection

;

•

Y

•

F

2

;

,

•

R

•

codes

G

G03)

retained

G

codes

are

(GOO

of

01

.

of

restored.

through

group

01

group

are

#5102

Note:

#5101,

ment,

will

movement.

Mnemonic

Reading

#5102,

and

be

ABSIO

Z-axis

deflection

servo

#5021,

of

when

performed

amount

commanded

after

ABSMT

position

#5022,

#5041,

during

completion

ABSOT

Enabled

#5042,

of

ABSKP

Note)

move¬

the

j.

Positional

When

specified,

obtained

The

unit

es

Metric

Inch

the

In

feature

System

Variable

system

.

of

user

is

#5001

#5002

#5021

#5022

#5041

#5042

Information

variables

various

the

input

macro

invalid.

Positional

X-axis

position

Z-axis

position

X-axis

position

Z-axis

position

X-axis

position

Z-axis

position

#5001

positional

information

0.001

0.

body,

Information

block

(ABSIO)

block

(ABSIO)

current

(ABSMT)

current

(ABSMT)

current

(ABSOT)

current

(ABSOT)

(#5001

0001

the

end

Through

through

information

millimeters

is

Unit

millimeter

inch

"input

#5102

unit

Read

Move

Enabled

#5102)

can

or

x

During

(Note)

are

10"

be

mch-

Meaning

Coordi¬

nate

system

Tool

position

Oflset

Tool

radius

compen¬

sation

Amount

Notes

When

1.

block,

G31

block.

2.

The

macro

the

by

part

macro

3.

System

be

placed

expression.

:

the

body.

End

sition

block

mediately

before.

Work

coordi¬

nate

system

Not

included

Not

included

the

skip

"input

call

G65

to

po¬

skip

signal

unit

block

C66)

or

variables

the

Command

of

current

im¬

position

(same

as

POS. MACHINBVERSAL

display)

Machine

coordi¬

.

nate

system

not

x

(the

but

#5001

is

position

10"

argument

is

feature

invalid

through

side

signal

left-hand

Command

current

position

(same

UN

POS.

display)

co¬

Work

ordinate

system

Included

turned

is

at

is

designation

in

o:

operational

as

I-

.

the

valid

the

#5102

Position

which

at

skip

did

nal

not

go

in

C31

block.

Work

ordinate

system

Included

on

in

end

up

user

ma>

sig¬

on

co¬

C31

of

to

not

71

2.8.24.4

Sample

The

(X,

forms

start

Main

G65

Macro

:

C

'603

#1

c2

91

G

COO

M

#

GOO

c.UO

Variables

Program

is

tool

Y,

Z)

the

positioned

on

machine

specified

point.

Program

X

9603

P

Program

,

#3001

=

1

#5002

,

X

Z

3

7

X#1

,

#502

#24-

[

[#26-#5022]

.

,

#2

,

#24

(Cont'd)

M

;

1

]

;

to

the

coordinate

feature,

U...

#26

specified

and

;

#13

system,

returns

location

per¬

of

List

Variable

No

#1

to

#33

Local

variables

to

#100

#149 #500

#549 #1000

#1015 #1032

#1100

#1115

#1132

#2001

to

Common

power-off)

Common

off)

.

Interface

for

each

Interface

for

each

Interface

Variables

variables

.

variables

input

bit)

.

input

output

bit)

.

output

Moaning

(reset

(retained

signals

signal

signals

signal

(each

15

{£

i=0

(each

15

(I

i=0

to"blank"

power-

at

signal

[lQOO

#

*

signal

#

00

1

fl

*

2i).

2i)

at

+

lÿ

+

i"l

#2050

to

#2101

#2150

#2201

to

Tool

(X-axis,

offset

amount

Z-axis,

nose

radius)

#2250

to

#2051

#2080

#2151

Tool

coordinate

(X-axis,

to

Z-axis)

data

#2180

to

#2081

#2099

#2181

to

Tool

(X-axis,

wear

amount

Z-axis)

#2199

#3000 #3001 #3002 #3003

#3004

#3100 #4001

#4120

#5001

#5002

#5021 #5022

#5041

#5042

#5061

#5062

#5081

#5082

#5101

#5102

to

Alarm

Clock

Single

complete

Feed-hold,

act-stop

RS232C

Current

command.

End

position

preceding

Current

system

Current

(for

each

Position

turned

Effective

amount

Servo

axis)

each

message

(in

1

units

(in

2

units

block

wait

feedrate-override,

control

data

value

block

position

(for

each

position

axis)

at

which

(for

on

tool

(X-axis,

position

display.

stop,

control.

output

of

the

(for

of

.

each

position

Z-axis)

deflection

of

1

Is).

of

auxiliary

(print

modal

immediate

each

machine

axis)

POS

skip

C31

axis)

ms)

function

out

information

axis).

coordinate

.

UNIVERSAL

signal

.

offset

amount

and

feature).

is

(for

ex¬

72

(4)

Variable

Each

that

a.

How

(i

#i

Sample

How

b.

number:

[

<expression

#

Sample

the

In

replaced

variable

follows

to

1,

=

to

following

with

Representation

is

represented

#.

designate

2,

3,

4.

#10

#130

#2000

designate

>)

[#100]

#

T#50Q

#

[#20/2]

description,

variable

Sample

(i)

a

in

variable

a

number

..)

.

an

expression

+

l]

#[<

directly:

as

variable

expression

a

#i

>].

number

variable

may

be

When

...

X#1

(ii)

...

F#2

(ui)

P

G04

(IV)

...

M

#4

...

G#4

Value

4.

maximum

the

5.

The

replaced

The

6.

brackets

in

point

When

=

When

#3

When

at

=

...

M03

G03

value

with

constant

its

45.2346

#1

=

X45.235

0.255

#2

=

F0.26

5.

#3

=

G04

=

2.

#4

=

each

for

programmable

that

Expression

[

1

end.

mm

(mm/rev)

37672

P5.

7236

address

follows

without

is

assumed

(for

377

metric

(see)

should

value.

address

an

>.

decimal

to

point

have

input)

not

exceed

may

enclosed

decimal

a

be

(5)

Variable

The

<

value

by

address

a.

replaced

When

the

(complement,

the

value

Sample

of

above

The

specification

G

X100.

01

:

Notes

1.

Address

bles.

2.

variable

A

a

variable.

Sample

Reference

that

variable.

a

>

the

of

variable

more

address.

#30

#101

#103

#140

G#30

specification

below

Z-300.

1,0,

/#8,

number

##20

#[

#20]

follows

or

#i

exactly)

1.

=

100.

=

300.

=

0.

=

X#101

.

and

N

#100

.

..

...

an

(address

or

;

0

;

,

3

i

Z-#102

equivalent

is

F0.

3

N

may

...

may

Error

Correct

address

its

is

;

not

Error.

not

.

>

negative

made

F

#140

refer

be

.

may

is

-ft

the

;

to

replaced

be

specified,

value

specified

the

varia-

to

with

(6)

Undefined

value

The

be

"blank."

following

a.

The

nation

Common

b.

of

time

c.

The

which

for

panel

.

of

situations:

local

not

was

power-on

local

the

Variable

an

undefined

An

undefined

variable

performed

variables

and

variables

values

for

#100

reset

and

were

variable

which

macro

in

through

operations.

common

not

argument

written

is

assumed

occurs

command.

call

#149

variables

from

at

the

in

desig¬

the

MD1

to

3.

values

ed.

When

a

below

variable

the

least

used

is

significant

as

address

digit

data,

are

the

round¬

73

2.8.24.4

Designation

the

in

control

versions

changed.

Concept

1

#0.

2

Variable

iscommanded

the

jin

Iment

I

(Variable

3

iscommanded

the

m

(program.

[Variable

4

commanded

is

j

the

in

tion

!NE.

1

'

t

(Others

5

Variable

and

following

set

is

to

A

of

(Cont'd)

(unction

two

cither

for

and

B

•No

of

•Commanding

#0

<blank>

replace-

equation

'Where

<blank>,

'mand

.

means

!

:

.

<blank>!*Where

ana

;<blank>,

mand

I

to

GOO

'Where

j

i(2)

"IF

not

“Condition

•Condition

is

<blank>,

#3

1)

"IF

established

#3

#3=#2

#3=#0+#0

#3

#3=2-

#3=5/

<Blank>

described

n0.

lished

<blank>,

<blank>.

established

are

and

condi-

of

part

<blank-

EQ

of

versions

version.

from

Version

conception

#0.

causes

#2

#3

#2

600

equivalent

command

x

0;

#2

0.

is

Condition

#3EQ#2"

Condition

NE#2"

#3

established

[

#

=

#0

=

5

=

*

"

when

<blank>,

#3

<blank>

A

to

B

A

alarm.

is

com-

#2;

=

0.

=

is

com-

x

#2;

is

.

#0+#0

#0

*

/

#0

#0 #0

in

the

above

IF

or

IF#3

0.

=

is

B.

and

Switching

cannot

A

Version

defined

•#0

variables

<blank>.

•Commanding

at

#0

hand

equation.

•Where

|<blank>,

mand

means

#3

•Where

<blank>,

mand

is

equivalent

to

command

GOO;

ignored.

is

<blank>,

is

#3

(I)

Condition

is

"IF

#3EQ#2”

established

(2)

Condition

]

is

"IF

#3EQ#2''

established.

.|

]

;

; ;

;

#2 #2

when

means

causes

replacement

is

GE#2

#3

and

0

is

#2

LT

#2

or

#2

In

commands

#3

is

classified

The

be

the

left-

sideofthe

#2

#3

=

<blank>.

=

#2

600

(Address

#2

0.

these

0.

=

#3

=

alarm.

treated

estab¬

is

are

#3

and

#3

not

is

and

<blank>,

from

inter¬

B

of

is

com-

#2;

is

com¬

x

#2;

is

2

is

#3

2.8.24.5

Various

variables

The

form

a

is

duced

operators

tions

#}

as

)

is

.

is

,

as

and

(1)

#i

=

(2)

#i

=

#i

=

#i

=

#i

=

(3)

#i

=

#i

=

#i

=

Note

variable

the

is

performed

(4)

#i

=

#1

=

#i

=

#1

=

#1

=

#1

=

#1

=

-

#1 #1

=

#i

=

#1

=

Operation

operations

and

operation

of

#1

by

combining

and

functions

,

#k

•••

#k

-

OR

XOR

#]

#k

*

#k

#)

/

#j

AND

•

OR,

In

value

Functions

SIN

[#)]

COS

[#j

TAN

[#}]

ATAN

SQRT

ABS

[

[#)

BIN

BCD

[

ROUND

FIX

[#)

FUP

[#)]

=

arithmetic

constants

Difinition

definition,

#k

32-bit

]

#j/#k]

[

[#]]

#j

#)]

[#]]

]

general

Variable

#)

Add-Type #}

#j

Multiply-Type

binary

can

between

expression

functions.

Operations

•

Sum

Difference.

•

Logical

32

•

Exclusive

(for

Operations

•

••

•

Quotient

••

•

XOR,

constant)

(or

equivalent

on

each

]

•ÿ

]

••

Commands

be

variables

is

operational

variables

are

as

may

be

and

replacement.

.

bits)

each

Product

Logical

(for

each

or

AND

bit.

Sine

Cosine

Tangent

Arctangent

Square

Absolute

Convert

Produce

Truncate

Raise

performed

and

represented

tn

which

.

and

The

available

follows.

used.

Replacement

(for

sum

.

logical

of

32

.

product

32

of

operation,

converted

is

and

(in

degrees)

(in

degrees).

(in

root.

value.

from

into

integer

the

fractions

between

constants.

expression

constants

Instead

each

sum

bits).

operation

the

degrees).

(in

degrees)

BCD.

fractions.

in

opeara-

of

the

.

by

roundini

to

into

the

of

a

pro

with

.

unit

74

(5)

Combinations

The

above

in

combinations.

formed

performed.

.

last

'

Sample

first.

ft

operations

Then,

An

add-type

+

#j

=

©

of

Operations

and

A

functional

a

#k

functions

operation

multiply-type

operation

SIN

*

[#*]

©

CD

may

operation

is

performed

is

be

used

per¬

X#10

ROUND

used

(b)

ROUND

the

to

#10 #11

GOO G01

GOO

;

is

not

as

shown

start

12.3758

=

13.1236

=

U#10

U#ll

U-

is

below:

used

point

,

;

F---

|ROUND

used

follows,

as

correctly.

START

POINT

;

[#10]

as

mentioned

the

#10

x

RETRACTION

+

ROUND

program

jin

r

0

[#ll]j

above;

re¬

.

,

GOO

Usually,

is

it

is

Sample

When

turns

(l)

(?)

(3)

©

(6)

Change

Priority

it

ing

hold)

those

Sample

(7)

Considerations

The

a.

its

at

When

b.

WHILE,

may

in

brackets

nesting

of

functional

ft

constant

end.

used

function

=

>

of

be

of

SIN

is

Operational

]

[

brackets

operations.

[#j

[

for

without

assumed

conditional

ROUND

to

.

given

in

Order

an

operation

Up

to

is

permitted

4

#k]

©

Operational

decimal

to

have

Expression

truncates

by

quintuple

4

#£

*

©

Commands

point

a

decimal

the

[

)

enclos¬

by

(five-

including

#m]

*

©

used

IF

fractions.

#n

in

point

or

This

is

and

being

If

©

then,

amount

U-

[#10

the

On

©ÿ©is

U#10

Hence

(8)

Operational

data

The

user

a.

Data

because

blocks

©

executed

block

GOO

the

:

other

U#ll

-

,

the

format

macros

Format

the

are

.

is

U-

#10+#11

[

movement

#ll]

=

hand,

U12.376

=

U25.500

=

program

and

as

are

data

substantially

made

is

U

[12.3758

-

U

-

[25.4994]

U

-

[25.499]

block

4

of

©

Errors

the

follows’

#10

of

]

U13

operational

and

;

the

by

4

movement

124

is

not

13.1236]

#11

rounded

following

of

correct.

errors

in

©

before

in

the

When

c.

rounds

digit.

Sample

#10

When

is

X

Q00

means

GOO

because This

used

off

the

(a)

12.3758

=

the

least

mm,

0.001

X

[ROUND

X12.376

8

12.3758

of

command

address

in

part

significant

the

[

;

is

also

below

following

;

#10]]

rounded.

is

equivalent

data,

the

digit

command

function

least

of

significant

address

to

ROUND

numeric

The

the

floating

M

where,

Operational

b.

Each

time

ing

error

of

ber

pensates

data

point

2E

*

sign

is

M

is

E

sign

operation

an

caused

is

significant

error

the

handled

format.

+

data

+

data

Errors

and

digits

sufficiently

in

52-bit

10-bit

is

performed,

is

accumulated.

is

15

user

binary.

binrry.

to

.

macros

16,

the

which

are

follow¬

The

com¬

of

num¬

75

2.8.24.6

commands

The

micro-program

a.

Branch

ssionÿ

h.

Repeat

expression

(1)

Branch

a.

If

established,

sequence

When

the

condition

to

[

IF

conditional

<

a

branch

Control

TO

GO

Command

>}

<

conditional

number

variable

destination

is

Commands

which

of

are

command

;

n

m

DO

Command

expressiorÿof

a

branch

n

or

satisfied,

not

block.

control

the

...

,

expression

within

an

following

IF

WHILE

is

made

the

expression

may

the

[<

conditional

this

to

same

be

changed.

program

flow

two

(

<

conditional

>)

GO

command

the

block

program.

is

used

of

the

types:

TO

proceeds

expre¬

is

of

for

If

n

the

Conditional

and

LE.

Conditional

;

n,

A

constant

and

used

Notes:

1.

head branch

the

#]

for

The

of

sequence

They

#1

#i

fc

#i

*i

.

A

n.

sequence

the

command.

expressions

Expression

£Q

NE

GT

LT

CE

#)

LE

<

and

variable

block

number

are

#)

#]

#)

#j

expression>

number when

are

represented

and

<expression

it

Otherwise,

is

ignored

must

is

KQ

tti

(#i

Uh

(#1

Oh

may

called

the

,

NE,

as

Meaning

*

> <

2

S

be

located

be

for

data

as

Gl',

follows:

fO

#))

#j)

#))

»))

used

may

>

by

shown

prior

LT.

for

be

at

the

a

to

below:

CE,

#i

3

DJ

IF

provide

:

Jlr

i

z

a

:

I

1

!“•

—

S

u

03

jy

CL

C-Nn

£

tn

IF

—

simple

GO

Conditional

expression

(Next

expression

branch

TO

Block)

,

n

GO

may

command

TO

as

n,

be

omitted

shown

to

below:

2.

longer

(2)

a.

(m

While

blocks

When

to

the

<

The

execution

Repeat

WHILE

,

1

=

END

between

it

block

Branch

,

reverse

[

2

and

m

unsatisfied,

is

Destination

G01

X10

branch

time

Command

<

conditional

3)

;

DO

following

Sequence

35

N

Z

Executed

this

on

than

expression

expression)

and

m

the

END

processing

in.

25

the

FO

data

m

No

25

with

ignored

program

forward

satisfied,

is

are

.

branch.

>]

DO

repeated

branches

takes

;

m

the

.

76

T3

V

Jr~

-5

•S

—

4)

w

c

D

WHILE

.

•—

END

“(Block

{ÿConditional

expression>J

m,

-

m)

following

END

;

DO

m

—

o>

x

When

[_<

conditional

m

DO

erally,

specification

the

END

and

this

I

jh

•c

si

u

U

3

-

£

J

--

t-

D

-

O

.0

So

8

=

expression

m

used

is

m

PO

IF

tn

ESP

made

is

>]

repeated

are

in

the

.

expression)ÿ

CO

,

the

format

TO

omitting

blocks

infinitely.

shown

,

n

WHILE

between

Gen¬

below.

a.

x

5.

micro

Triple

program.

DO DO DO

C65-

END

DO-Ioop

1

.

2

.

3

.

•

ABC

3

.

,

2

1

.

nesting

DO

G65'

END END

END

permitted

is

)

.

2,

,

3

•

XYZ

,

3

2

.

,

1

for

each

,

:

Notes

DO

1.

2.

of

m

value.

m.

in

3.

The

repeatedly

4.

To

used.

entrance

—

m

should

m

DO

However,

DO

1

END

1

2

DO

—

2

END

same

except

get

out

However,

to

a

Nn

specified

be

and

END

only

The

called

is

number,

DO

and

other

-

identification

where

of

DO

a

GO

DO

loop

m

should

2,

1,

value

the

whichisused

END

repeat

loop

TO

n

as

shown

before

or

3

m,

1,

of

identification

call

to

number

ranges

,

a

GO

does

below:

have

may

2,

each

TO

not

END

or

may

the

be

3

by

be

overlap.

n

enable

m.

same

specified

used

can

be

6.

(i)

(n)

(m)

The

Enabled

codings

DO

1

DO

1.

END

DO

1

END

DO

1

DO

END

shown

,

;

1

-

.

)

,

-

1

.

,

Overlap

ranges

9

2

permitted.

.

Rewrite

shown

—

1

The

of

One

END

is

as

right

Enabled

below

return

1

END

DO

of

not

cause

destination

is

unknown

is

1

missing

DO

END

1

2

,

1

2

1

error:

an

.

,

DO

1

Ip-COTO

x>

go

“L.N100

END

100

,

1

;

2

.

-ÿGOTO

:

|i

DO

SU-NIOO

END

°

,

100

,

1

,

]

,

END

-

77

2.8.24.6

<l\)

)

(\

DO

END

DO

7000

N

END

Control

1

.

:

.

3

.

1

.

1

3

2

1

.

1

nesting

triple

(Cont'd)

nesting.

permit¬

Commands

Quadruple

Max

is

,

-

ted

(2)

Classification

program

The

follow

Piogram

OJ

08000

08990

ll'C

to

No

07404

to

of

numbers

riip.-i

erased,

ed

.

restrictions

When

registration,

programs

Program

are

Classilication

piogi

D4

of

are

classified

ini.-.

m.iy

ui

edited

is

*6004

erase,

disabled

Numbers

be

icgistcr-

without

to

set

edit

and

into

1,

the

of

.

is

erase,

disabled

Of

#33)

#500

set

and

by

to

edit

Local

and

through

the

1.

of

And

common

following

Com¬

var

#549)

#6021

D7

(#1

And

through

and

of

are

Write

#149,

written

Display

through

When

registration,

programs

9000

to

.

,

may

loop

DO

be

entered

outside

not

from

0

09999

2.

8.

24.

mon

Variables

Local lables

can

be

operations

8

variables

(#100

displayed

IF

2.8.24.7

(1)

How

The

registration

(macro

manner

Hence,

anphes

programs)

as

there

to

subprograms,

together

capacity

.

1

GO

O

7000

Registration

to

Make

usual

is

the

user

and

the

in

part

,

—

of

Registration

and

edit

are

performed

part

programs

program

no

macro

program

1

User

of

body.

programs

Macros

of

user

size

memory

User

macro

in

the

and

subprograms.

restriction

Part

may

Macros

bodies

same

programs,

be

stored

to

its

that

full

(1)

Display

Press

be

Key-in

of

provided

Display

a.

may

b.

CURSOR

not

need

bers

including

their

data

the

in

fraction

L

signed

SETTING

LEVEL

#0100 #0101 #0102

#0109

Operations

Variables

SET

the

key

be

keyed

are

part.

Macro

(0

0

function

anywhere.

variable

or

CURSOR

in.

the

specified

displayed.

8-digit

nesting

not

Macro

MACRO

-12345678

key.

number

t

Ten

integer

level

execution)

in

0

3

Mode

key.

sets

variable

The

data

part

01234

12345678

00000001 00000000

N

and

of

and

0033

select

press

However,

variable

number

are

displayec

the

positioi

#

num¬

and

8-digit

78

Sample

Display

of

Common

RDY

Variables

c.

Press

display

may

PAGE

+

be

key

scrolled

or

PAGE

up

or

T

key,

down.

and

the

2.8.24.9

User

(1)

Summary

Considerations

Macros

of

Restrictions

And

Remarks

For

Remarks

Common

a.

for

review.

b.

For

rently when

local

the

other

variables

to

rest

(2)

Write

Writing

Press

a.

may

be

b.

Key-m

press

ever,

variable

positioned

c.

Key-m

key.

of

the

ed. d.

Press

f

PAGE

e.

Repeat

values

local

executed

a

macro

variables

nesting

after

"blank."

Operations

of

Values

SET

provided

CURSOR

need

#

number

to

keyed-in

The

variable

key

to

the

variables

variables,

are

of

a

nesting

belonging

levels

completion

to

function

anywhere.

the

variable

not

it.

value

key

be

is

number

i

the

CURSOR

PAGE

or

-

operations

desired

may

those

displayed.

cannot

Variables

key.

number

or

keyed-in.

specified

to

be

value

with

key

in

variables.

always

of

level

to

seen.

be

of

execution

Mode

T

CURSOR

and

written.

stored

is

the

or

CURSOR

to

move

c.

and

be

displayed

macro

the

Consequently,

execution,

is

in

macros

of

The

are

select

be

to

written

key.

keyed-in

The

cursor

the

Press

the

as

cursor

i

d.

to

the

position¬

key

cursor.

write

cur¬

the

local

all

position

How-

is

WR

data

or

the

Available

a.

through

#1

through

#100

through

#500

System

b.

Available

Maximum Minimum

Constant

c.

1(8

digits

decimal

Sample

Operational

d.

Decimal

Macro

e.

Quadruple

Maximum

f.

Triple

Repeat

g-

1,

m

=

#33

variables

value

above

points)

Maximum

Minimum

digits

15

Call

(four-hold)

(three-

Command

2,

and

Variables

•••

#149

T

#549

Variable

•••

Values

decimal

.

value

Accuracy

significant.

Maximum

Nesting

hold)

3.

variables.

Local

Common

variables.

Values

±10+3°8

308

ilO"

<

Expression

Usable

in

point).

(7

199999999.9999999

10.0000001

Nesting

Level

.

Repeat

(DO)

of

each

Identifier

macro.

Level

for

digits

Command

m

>

below

Remarks

a.

Common

b.

Local

time

other

Any

attempt

rewriting

tion

may

attempting

ation

by

is

it

safe

c.

The

ables

the

reset

written

#100

variables

than

to

of

local

cause

the

single

to

rewrite

through

operation

may

when

so

do

variables

an

unexpected

rewriting,

stop

1

variables.

local

#149

or

can

always

not

a

macro

is

invalidated.

stop

unction

variables

are

the

power-on

be

written

is

during

failure.

the

and

reset

be

in

macro

machine

check

to

changed.

at

execution.

However,

Before

to

common

"blank"

operation.

any

execu¬

oper¬

see

vari¬

by

h.

Maximum

Quintuple

(2)

Difference

Nesting

(five-hold).

between

Level

User

of

Macro

Brackets

and

Sub¬

program

argument

allow

G66

and

but

body

M98

G65

the

macro

without

with

of

the

block.

subprogram

directly

executing

G65

in

macro.

the

a

branch

command

or

(M98)

branches

block

G66

With

performed

is

(if

any)

any

docs

the

to

command

and

sub¬

the

other

not.

has

after

than

macros

User

a.

designation

it

b.

user

that

no

program,

the

P

and

user

The

macro

was

specified

relationship

execution

L

however,

in

79

2.8.24.9

User

Macros

The

c.

quadruple

subprograms

d.

If

user

automatic

is

restricted

to

up

four

mode

or

(3)

Relationship

a.

MDI

execution b.

MDI

body

commands

control

commands.

Considerations

(Cont'd)

maximum

including

is

also

macros

operation,

to

quardruple.

levels

the

mode,

permits

called

does

such

memory

writing

of

writing

nesting

are

of

with

And

G65

and

quadruple

specified

the

maximum

nesting

or

MDI

the

macro.

not

permit

as

operational

Remarks

level

of

G66

but

With

are

separately

Operation

macro

For

user

calls.

separately.

via

MDI

nesting

subprograms,

permitted

in

and

call

or

execute

commands

macro

That

during

level

m

MDI

is

tape

mode.

the

macro

of

and

(6)

Relationship

slash

The

an

of

side is

assumed

not

does

(7)

Parameter

Classification

(1)

Disabling

And

The

following

registered

inadvertent

Setting

Number

#6004

character

"/"

operational

to

be

mean

the

Setting

of

Edit

setting

user

destruction.

with

the

optional

Program

macros

Optional

used

expression

operator

of

is

permitted

and

Block

in

the

for

skip.

Program

Registration,

subprograms

Skip

right-hand

or

m

quotient.

Number

to

protect

brackets

It

Erase,

the

from

c.

When

stopped

MDI

may

(4)

The

search

macro

(5)

a.

The

mand

single

enabled

is

b.

the

single

tional

System

c.

single

mentioned

D}

a

by

writing

be

specified

Relationship

address

for

the

.

body

Relationship

operational

blocks

block

for

However,

block

and

coma.

block

Setting

*6004

D1

D

System

0

*

0

=

1

=

1

=

macro

the

single

command

search

sequence

not

do

switch

the

when

and

variable

stop,

above

#3003

able

or

1

=

0

or

=

or

1

=

or

0

=

program

and

with

function

with

command

single-block

is

other

setting

switch

control

#3003

see

operate

Vari¬

3

2

3

2

being

block

executed.

Address

numbers

Single

turned

macro

number

enabled

is

command.

(for

2.8.24.5)

'

When

Switch

None

of

commands, mands,

stop.

mands

[Operational

control

I

stop.

of

All

commands,

mands,

General

stop.

the

stop.

|

[None

[command,

|mands,

‘mands

jmands

stop

Search

not

is

Block

and

stop

on.

program

the

as

shown

Single

the

operational

control

and

commands

command

the

operational

control

and

general

operational

control

and

general

executed

function,

to

the

permitted

the

in

Switch

control

if

This

#60Q4Dj

for

control

and

setting

Bock

on

is

general

do

commands

com-

macro

user

the

switch

blocks.

the

below:

com¬

and

not

com-

com¬

com-

is

any

com¬

=

opera¬

of

to

1,

#6004

D2

=

#8000

tion,

2

D

=

enabled

Parameter

Number

#6021

D7

=

#9000

tion,

D7

=

enabled

(8)

Effects

a.

A

(

#1

through

(#100

A

b.

multiple

making

gram

1

through

erase,

•

0

.

•

1

through

erase,

0

.

reset

through

reset

call

the

head.

The

and

•

Registration,

•

The

and

Registration,

of

Reset

operation

#33)

#149)

operation

state

program

programs

#8999

edit.

programs

#9999

edit.

Operation

and

to

and

pointer

are

resets

part

"blank.”

resets

the

of

program

disabled

erase,

of

program

disabled

erase,

all

common

of

the

multiple

return

numbers

for

registra¬

and

edit

numbers

registra¬

for

edit

and

local

variables

user-macro

loop

DO

to

the

are

state

pro¬

80

(1)

in

(9)

Special

The

the

user

Codes

special

macro

Usable

codes

body:

listed

in

User

below

Macro

may

Body

be

used

2.

from

poses,

outputted

is

When

the

NC

the

codes

for

unit

upper

code

immediately

shown

punch-out

(UC)

below

or

before.

are

or

lower

outputted

other

code

pur¬

(LC)

Code

SP

c

*

)

*

I

n

*

.

c

]

*

$

0

?

Notes

1.

For

character

tern

shown

patterns

parameters

#6110

#6111

#6112

#6113

#6114

#6115

Read

convert

to

the

shown

8

O

When

pattern

Use

comment

For

alarm

message

comment

Add

Subtract

comment

For

Divide

Variable

Multiply

Equal

Bracket(open]

Bracket

(close)

For

comment

Decimal

point

.

the

hole

is

attached

above

be

may

:

[

••

3

*

(

the

desired

it

into

parameter.

below

7

the

6

value

listed

is

5

4

O

C

pattern

is

specified

hole

the

set

0

o

ot

the

in

EIA

?

8

6

5

O

CO

o

odq

pi

lO

op

Parameter

designation

OOO

00

0

O

—

OO®

00

with

standard.

pattern

decimal

For

example,

as

”152":

3

2

parameter

the

above

Code

0

4

3

o

s

C

o

0

ob

0

o

00

0

=

0®0

0

o

boiooo

00

0®

of

EIA

an

by

equivalent,

1

table

2

87654o32

1

O

b

COCO®

O

DOO

OO

00

code,

asterisk,

However,

using

the

in

the

is

Code

ISO

O

o

d

0®

0

0«0

000®

o®boo

0

o

O

000*0

00®

00=0

O

0

when

the

binary

hole

"0,"

provided.

O

0

CO

b

O

00

O®

o

00

o

0

o

0

the

other

following

and

pattern

the

1

o

0

the

pat¬

value

set

hole

#,

Codes

a.

Code

b.

Codes

c.

designation

2.8.24.10

Shown

and

below

their

105

The the

106

There

107

A

preceded

...

Alarm

are

causes.

MACRO

number

specified

MACRO

are

MACRO

format

by

UC

•

LC

by

only

UC

by

(,),

Number

the

ERROR

of

,

*,

=

Of

user-macro-associated

(CONSTANT)

constants

range.

ERROR

G67

many

too

than

(FORMAT)

expression

ERROR

other

•••

•

User

cancel

*,

at

parameter

Macros

is

in

$,

?.

excess

codes.

has

alarms

of

an

error.

defined

assignment

disabled

(5)

is

M99

nesting

(UNDEFIN

as

(#NO

(

]

[

level

.

(MOVE

specified

called

(5)

level

(4)

,

108

109

110

111

it

112

The

ber

The

the

The

the

A

end

The

of

move

the

MACRO

value

is

MACRO

variable

one

MACRO

bracket

upper

MACRO

command

MACRO

macro

ERROR

not

designated.

ERROR

of

is

that

ERROR

nesting

limit

ERROR

command

ERROR

call

upper

limit

a

NOT

for

5

is

G66

by

#NO)

variable

LEFT)

statement

assignment.

LIMIT)

excess

in

M99)

-

the

m

G66.

in

is

num¬

is

of

macro

excess

113

81

2.8.24.10

1H

DO

115

The

136

DO

117

Alarm

MACRO

and

END

MACRO

format

MACRO

is

m

not

Number

ERROR

are

ERROR

<

of

ERROR

in

the

of

(DO

not

([

expression

(DO

range

User

FORMAT)

paired.

]

-

Macros

UNMATCH)

>

has

END

NO.

<_m<_

1

of

an

(Cont'd)

error.

)

3.

T:

S:

T-

Type

type

fore

to

understand.

OK.

lowing

U-50.

#21

Right.

former

for

1

allows

makes

When

variables:

W-60.

Using

program

I

#23

small

the

type

number

use

of

argument

1

is

F6.

0

#9

these

(P2).

of

,

W

U

designation

used,

variables,

variables.

F

and

we

have

(P3)

rewrite

and

the

This there¬

easier

fol-

the

118

2.8.24.11

(1)

Canned

(Teacher).

T

(Student):

S

T-

An

following

f"c

This

and

assumed

is

GO

9999.

example

92

executed

not

MACRO

n

TO

Exercises

Cycle

We

ed

write

create

cises.

cutting

a

Wnere

format’

U-50.

command

that

included

ERROR

not

is

by

have

rules

simple

of

usual

W-60.

is

v.ithin

Rapid

(P2)

Of

user

some

shall

divided

in

the

User

G92

discussed

you

macros.

Let’s

cycle

operation.

G92

F6.0

the

Pull

this

(GO

TO

range

Macro

have

macros

user

take

G92,

by

start?

we

command

:

into

NC

unit.

Out

command.

N)

of

many

to

understand

Now,

straight

the

Threading

of

0

£n

complicat¬

let's

as

exer¬

thread¬

because

takes

(PI)

following

is

It

£

the

S:

OK.

(P4)

the

No.

r

l

I

we

this

F6.0

-#23

THREAD-

CUTTING

#23

a

have

macro

complete

of

macro

will

(P

;

J?

#21

i

I

complete

call

formats.

body

be:

5)

and

is

U#21

W#23

U-#21

W-#23

all

right?

add

;

easy.

macro

it.

the

macro

;

F#9

; ;

body.

G65,

program

U-50.

;

this

body

call

-#21

and

create

in

command

W-60.

GOO

©

(2)

G32 GOO

©

GOO

©

Is

Yes.

user

©

:

That's

Then,

the

Let

Supposing

09093;

G65

this

M99

user

me

P9093

Just

macro

using

try

to

T:

is

it

S

T:

S:

82

The

user

;

U

#21

W#23

U-#21

W-#23

;

macro

;

F#9

;

©

?

THREAD-000!©

CUTTING

•

o

©

lead

and

variables.

into

local

#33,

varia¬

through

of

09093

GOO G32

GOO GOO

M99

can

local

,

F6.0

,

moving

all

variable

But

,

converted

be

which

©j

+X

O

distances

#1

type

GOO

32

C

GOO

J

u-50.

W-60.

U50.

W60.

these

are

they'’

!

©

;

©

|

©

First,

threads

S:

They

jren't

ble

body

is:

(P6)

T:

That

looks

OK.

T:

Very

good.

I

S:

think

gram,

every

That's

T:

when

once,

only

S:

Do

convenience?

do.

T:

I

(#100-#549)

write

points

I've

S:

into

09000

#100 #101=#9

M99

points

U

you

the

got

two

=

;

something

have

1

time!

true.

values

their

is

specified.

have

In

such

macro

W

and

it!

parts

;

#23

;

**********

is

wrong.

to

specify

a

With

W

any

a

help.

F.

Now,

as

usual

andFhave

are

trick

case,

Using

to

designate

divide

I

follows:

points

canned

been

retained.

overcome

to

common

the

With

W

specified

variables

the

macro

pro¬

this

and

F

cycle,

Thereafter,

this

variables,

position

body

(P8)

in¬

of

S:

T:

S:

I'd

like

pull-out.

OK.

rapid

All

right.

r

\

-

Macro

G65

P9000

G65

P9093

G65

P9093

to

try

about

How

threading

W-

call

is

**********

to

designating

pull-out

Let's

a

as

follows:

W-60.

U-50.

U-51.4

.

U-.

program

see

4_i

K4.8F6.0

;

using

U-/2

U:

K:

Rapid

the

address

DIAMETER

VALUE

RADIUS

VALUE

OUT

;

threading

width

of

WITH¬

SIGN

K?

09093

GOO G32

GOO

M99

and

G65

G65 G65

;

U

#21

W#100

U-#21

W-#100

:

write

I

P9000

P9093 P9093

P9093

,

F

#101

;

the

W-60.

U-50.

U-51.4

U-52.6

U...

;

macro

F6.0

;

call

;

as

follows:

(P9)

(P10)

Macro

09000

#100 #101 #102

M99

09093

#10

#11

#12

G000 G32

G32

GOO

M99

body

;

#23

=

#9

=

ABS

=

;

ROUND

=

ROUND

=

ROUND

=

U#21

W#12

U#10

U-#ll

W-#100

as

is

;

#6]

[

#102]

[

#21]

[

[#100]

;

F#101

W-#102

;

follows:

;

y

;

*2

+

;

#10

+

ROUND

RAPID

PULL-OUT

[#102]

;

THREADING

this

OK?

83

Is

2.8.24.11

Yes.

T

you

programming

block

I

und

expand

Exercises

Your

had

or

!IIS

threndcutting

W-directions

/

i

O-

V

see.

Let

How

I

S.

---

,

*11

i

User

Of

reasoning

better

#3004

this

prevent

#3003

invalid

only.

function

?

f

I

1

can

h—

i

me

think.

,

THREAD-

CUTTING

the

about

nr~

--

GOO

is

right.

a

invalid

control

be

Now

in

four

program?

T

Macro

(Cont'd)

Practically,

malfunction

control

of

performed

we'd

directions.

\

i

?

T

i

/

U/2

by

of

single

feedhold.

in

to

like

START

POINT

U-

09093

#3003

M93

#10

=

[

ABS]

IF

[

IF

#21

[

IF

#11

=

#12=#10

TO

GO

N1

#11

#12

=

N2

#13

[ABS

IF

[

#100

IF

I

#14

=

#15

=

GO

TO

3

N

#14

i

#15

=

.

;

1

=

;

—

ROUND

GT

EQ

ROUND

2

=

-#10

=

#100

ROUND

-

#1

5

=

#13

]

[

#21

]

0

]

0

;

ROUND

;

ROUND

[#100

GT

0

EQ

0

,

3

;

ROUND

[#102]

LT

GO GO

[#21

]LT

]

]G0T0

[#100]

Single

4-block

#10]

TO

]

[

#21

[

#1021

#13]

GOTO

[#100]

+

*2

#10

]

3

4;

+

block

invalid

buffering

,

;

TO

;

TO

4

.

U

4

W:

GO

1

4

-#11

;

#13

;

GO

---

;ÿ

-#13

•W

Negative

:

Positive

Negative

•

Positive

.

I

U,

K

L

W

K F

The

G65

The

09000

#100

#101

#102

M99

Designation

»2l

=

#23

=

#b

=

#9

=

macro

P9000

P9093

user

,

#23

=

F9

=

ABS

=

.

(DIAMETER

(RADIUS

call

-

45

\\

40

U

U41

..

U

macro

.

-

.

—

#6]

[

a

with

without

VALUE)

command

K4.

,

;

4

,

body

VALUE)

0

F5.

as

is

W

|

K

sign

is

0

a

sign

as

follows:

,

follows:

--

T:

GO

4

N

5

N

#3004

32

G

32

G

#3004

GOO

M92

#3003

M99

Well.

error

That's

5

TO

#3000

GOO

U#2l

7

=

W

#14F#101

U#12

0

=

U-#ll

W-#100

;

0

=

;

If

will

good.

;

499

=

-

W#15

;

U

or

be

(MACRO

.

“Feedhold

Feedrate

Positioning

completion

-

;

[

-

0,

W

=

displayed

INPUT

Rapid pull-out

ERR.)

Error

override

threading

display

and|U/2|or|w|<K,

in

your

programming.

.

Invalid

84

2.8.25

Program

NC

the

around

G

of

(1)

(2)

Details

When

ed

in

PROGRAM

mirror

program

the

command.

;

G68

;

69

G

When

program

operation

axis verted

manual

The

and

feed

this

by

the

movement

the

with

following

the

work

•••

with

handle

feature.

of

X-axis

Z-axis

inversion

NC

MIRROR

image

operation

center

Program

The

program

state

fied.

Program

The

program

state

.

fied

mirror

by

Z-axis

operations

program

by

being

unit:

is

the

/step

mirror

the

line

mirror

held

mirror

held

being

mirror

is

IMACE

feature

in

all

(2-axis)

mirror

until

mirror

until

image

program

NC

the

(manual

feed)

image

NC

program

center

the

processed

(C68,

directions

image

G69

image

G68

on,

is

center

continuous

not

are

feature

to

by

on.

is

off.

IS

line.

069)

reverse

the

on

speci¬

off

speci¬

the

in¬

is

line.

affected

is

invert¬

is

X-

The

+

use

on,

h.

i.

j.

+X

operational

The

position

command

T

tool

tion

G

command

tion

virtual

compensation

for

nose

for

tool

X

N

VIRTUAL

center

>

1

N

K.

TOOL

Fig.

direction

nose

tool

nose

tool

nose

/WIN

CENTER

*

~

NOSfr

SOS)

'TOOLS

CENTER

2.40

is

inverted

position

radlut

\

i

Tool

y

Virtual

Compensation

and

G4

mirror

tion

after

inverted.

radius

coopsnsation

cantar

OIXE

T

C41

tool

A

whan

is

X-axis

compensa¬

in

the

compensa¬

is

inverted.

‘“1

tool

nos*

2

+

T-UDDD

canter

X-axis

usage

func¬

on.

tool

sign.

,

a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

f.

command

X

inverted

U

command

value

command

I

arc

center

Circular

+x

I

command

volume

command

I

distance

for

.

for

inverted.

is

for

is

motion

CHANCED

TO

CO

3

for

and

for

is

X-axis

inverted.

direction

I

PROGRAMMED

ROTATIONAL

v

CIRCULAR

DIRECTION

WITH

FEATURE

Fig.

X-axis

direction

canned

inverted.

coordinate

incremental

coordinate

inverted.

CIRCULAR

DIRECTION

ARC

ROTATIONAL

MOVEMENT

X-AXIS

ON

IN

MIRROR

IMACE

2.39

beveling/rounding

inverted.

is

cycle

taper

value

coordinate

value

ARC

X-axis

is

of

g.

U

and

finishing

commands

I

allowance,

for

special

etc.

are

canned

inverted.

cycles

85

2.8.25

(CONT’D)

(3)

Cautions

a.

G68

belong

fied

b.

G69

the

program

.

These

c

tool

state.

d.

These

finishing

cycle.

e.

If

is

feature

mediate

ed

origin,

affected

X

+

PROGRAM

for

G69

and

to

a

on

single

(program

time

of

reset.

commands

nose

radius

commands

shape

automatic

specified

is

point

the

by

which

by

MIRROR

G68

are

"10"

group.

block

mirror

power-on,

compensation

program

origin

when

on,

the

specified

mirror

is

an

feature.

this

X

C28

7-

PROGRAMMED

MEDIATE

and

G69

modal

image

must

not

may

return

the

X-axis

positioning

image,

absolute

Z

INTER¬

POINT

IMAGE

commands

G

commands

They

basis,

reset

be

specified

be

of

in

but

must

in

off)

operation,

specified

the

"G28

mirror

X

and

the

position,

(C68,

which

be

principle.

is

used

in

cancelled

special

X---

the

of

is

Z

machine

ABSOLUTE

4-

G69)t

speci¬

the

in

canned

z-

image

inter¬

affect¬

is

ZERO

POINT

at

and

the

•

not

Power

on

+

X40.

X80.

50

X120.

reference

execution

X240.

Z120.

;

-

U480.

Z80.

;

-

U480.

Z40.

:

TD1

Z220.

T0101

;

Tllll

T0101

point

X-axis

mand

display

;

-

;

-

;

—

;

—

return

com¬

value

240.000

96.000

-96.000

+384.000 +144.000

-144.000

336.000

-

176.000

OFFSET

220.

|

_

TURRET

A

X-axis

movement

U-144.000

U240.000

U-

.

160

01

X56.

.

Z8

000

Manual

Program

N0001 N0002

N0003

N0004 N0005

N0006

I)

.

•

N0007

N0008

G50

G68 G50

G69

G

+

x

t

EXAMPLE

Described

G68

uses

shown

and

in

the

below

and the

X-axis

n7

Fig.

is

G69

for

diagram

movements.

2.41

sample

a

the

on

program

opposed

following

the

z

tool

which

rest

page,

52

roi

82

120

80

n

+

ss

1

S2

T01

i

l

TURRET

B

OFFSET

11

L

2"

I

X|4.

g

86

2.8.26

(C70

MULTIPLE

C76)

TO

t

REPETITIVE

CYCLES

(3)

The

ing

internal

shape

memory

program:

for

storing

the

finish¬

2.8.26.1

This

instance,

For

performed

are

work

ing

C

code

G70

C71

72

G

G73 C74

G75

G

76

(1)

(2)

option

Table

Finishing

Stock

Pattern

Peck

Grooving

Automatic

G70

modal.

The

G71,

by

The

45

is

General

makes

both

only

shape.

2.

21

cycle

removal

repeating

drilling

in

through

program

G72

memory

blocks.

program

stock

by

Multiple

Name

in

turning lacing

in

axil

in

Z

axis

X

threadcutting

G76

of

finishing

and

capacity

simple

removal

commanding

Repetitive

Fimahing

70

by

C

poasible

Tip

nose

impossible

are

in

*

shape

are

G73

for

stored

the

and

Remark!

ridius

group

finishing

short.

finishing

the

finish¬

Cycles

Tip

compensation

possible

compensation

and

specified

in

note

radius

non-

memory.

shape

To

tation

binary-converted

memory

(one

called

shape

program

(4)

In

G76,

specified

group

may

by

(5)

It

compensation

G73.

(6)

Tool

performed

Any

shorten

pair)

the

have

the

is

possible

nose

attempt

the

time,

the

for

storing

in

internal

the

program,

memory.

block

codes

G

again.

G

codes

been

execution

radius

on

stock

the

after

specified

changed

to

on

the

do

to

removal

finishing

then

and

finished

unit.

memory

which

cycle

the

of

01

This

is

of

this

perform

cycle

the

compensation

cycle

so

will

shape

This

differs

group

because

before

to

cycle.

tool

of

G74

of

result

is

shape

memory

for

of

other

nose

G70

cycle

program

stored

finishing

from

G70

should

the

G

radius

through

cannot

through

in

compu¬

m

the

program

is

the

part

through

be

01-

cycle

codes

be

G76.

an

error.

is

Program

Note'

multiple

each

ed

as

Gil

One

Gill

When

block

the

One

G112

of

cornering

containing

value

block

or

12

G

block

finishing

cornering

listed

including

(Gill,

shape

(Gil,

them below

G112)

must

.

No

of

Two

Four

Five

45

S

G12)

blocks

and

are

be

used,

count¬

87

2.8.26.2

removal

k

Mut

remained

ance

Commands

Stock

lor

Removal

in

turnmi;

uncut

tnushcd

can

contour

in

Turning

with

commanded

be

the

are

(G71)

finishing

by

different

allow¬

G71.

be-

tween

caved

monotonous

shaped

path.

increase

/dot.

reuse

and

u»n

(1)

Nns

•

n

Monotonous

shape

S

f

71

G

Finishing Tool

Sequence

F

cycle

increase

and

Pns

path

is

Qnf

shape

number

S

commands

executed

/decrease

I

U±*

Finishing

X-axis

program

-*•

A

ns.

nf

••

A’

should

are

.

finishing

Sequence

W

Finishing

direction

(diameter

-*•

B

effective

+

...

allowance

(45

blocks

with

start

number

+

!

K*

Rough

allowance

Z-axis

of

the

in

finishing

Rough

(radius

designation)

maximum)

and

ns

when

only

for

cycle

for

cycle

•

D--.

•

Depth

(designation

finishing

allowance

designation)

in

the

direction

with

end

finishing

G70

start

finish

of

nf.

F(E)

•

Feedrate

designation

in

turning

cut

m

without

allowance

in

Note:

and

are

stock

•

and

X-axis

.

S.

Note

spindle-speed

stock

for

direction

signs)

in

Z-axis

direction

Feed

spindle

given

removal

;

direction

command

command(S)

executing

for

cycle.

removal

F(E)

88

I

By

I

L

,\lsul\G

I

LOWWCL

ROICH

INC

G7]

finish

cycle

terminated

designation)

omitted

(Retracting)

r

--

V

A

ft

>7

'

M-UKASCS

---

r—

-

—

A

VI

starts

In

at

point

),

case

and

,

{

the

-

cycle

(

---

the

C

K

Fig.

of

D

Start

at

2

2.42

A,

)

and

returns

I

=

rough

and

position

executes

the

to

and

0

finishing

finish

A

Finishing

program

Stock

cycle

Rough

cycle

rough

point

K

=

removal

finishing

rough

finishing

A

(or

0

cycle

Fig.

is

performed

motion

specified

(Retracting)

f

*'U

2.43

depends

by

w

by

if

rapid

the

traverse

on

the

program

speed

of

X

+

B'

shape

FINISHING ALLOWANCE

Retracting

GOO.

to

be

(GOOorG01)

Thrust

AA1.

no

of

by

or

cut

10%

step

G71/G72

setting.

D

along

within

cut

See

X-axis

depth

item

depth

Each

overrided

is

be

of

ride

0

to

selection

200%,

the

can

range

over¬

(3),

g.

NOTES:'

1.

2.

+x

B

tool

The

programmed

decrease

following

The

in

ation

and

programming

the

end

program.

MONOTONOUS

X:

INCREASE

'ÿ

MONOTONOUS

A

al

INCREASE

r?

K K

MONOTONOUS

X.

DECREASE

MONOTONOUS*.

2:

INCREASE

Nnf

BA

IS

IN

of

path

be

to

in

and

X

should

block

%

A

'

-V-

A

PARALLEL

finishing

monotonous

Z

coordinates.

be

the

(Nnf)

B

+x

°

IS

AA

PARALLEL

X

AXIS

WITH

Z

AXIS

shape

increase

taken

into

start

of

a

finishing

WNOTONOUS

X:

INCREASE

MONOTONOUS

:

Bt

DECREASE

+z

9

MONOTONOUS

:

DECREASE

MONOTONOUS

DECREASE

IN

WITH

should

block

1

Specified

I

in

|

C01

I

be

or

consider¬

(Nns)

shape

A

K

A

COO

or

node

1:

Note

spindle

and

of

stock

2:

Note

concaved

specified.

a

ft

X

%

+x

&

G71

cutting

cycle

terminated.

finishing Retracting

GOO.

(GOO

AA\

can

range

override

8-

Specifies

command

removal

Computes

finishing

\

starts

///

at

cycle

(

)

,

and

cycle

---

is

Thrust

G01)

or

Each

depth

be

overrided

0

to

of

selection

feed

the

(S)

for

cycle.

cutting

the

shape

detract

r

h

//ROUGH

program

ing)

\

—

2BHHÿ

FINISHING

SHAPE

STOCK

ROUCH

A,

)

and

returns

is

not

skipped.

depends

cut

of

10%

by

or

executes

setting.

point

(

-

If

I

is

performed

motion

specified

200%,

command

the

path

J-

—

FINISHING

ALLOWANCE

SHAPE

REMOVAL

FINISHING

the

rough

to

point

specified,

rapid

by

the

by

along

D

step

G71/G72

(F(E))

execution

for

if

R1

z

At

//A

A

CYCLE

the

finishing

A

the

traverse

on

the

program

X-axis

within

cut

See

the

is

POSITION

SHIFTED

FKOH

A

(CUTTING)

U/2

rough

to

rough

speed

the

depth

item

BY

be

of

Pol

0/2*1

D

(3)

Iff

,

&

(2)

Nns

•

Nnf

a.

•

F

•

S

Concaved

Command

G71

Pn*

finishing

format

Qnf

Ui

“Finishing

Tool

n#

Sequence

nf

Sequence

•

IT

TT

Finishing

—

X-axis

shape

path

A

contour

D

‘-Depth

Rough

direction

(diameter

program

A1

for

number

for

number

F(E)

Note

1

of

finishing

(radius

designation)

(45

B

cut

blocks

(designation

allowanceinthe

cycle

start

cycle

R

S

in

X*axis

without

allowance

designation)

direction

maximum)

finish

1

Note

signs)

in

,

2

direction

X-axis

of

b.

COMMAND

OF

FINAL

OF

FINISHING

SHAPE

PROGRAM

Cautions

gram

(i)

POINT

BLOCK

Rough

the

&

B’

T

for

cutting

closest

concaved

cycle

concave

©

o®

t

0.

finishing

G71

by

the

to

SL

©

A

starts

start

©

shape

point.

©

a

pro¬

from

i

*

COWAN!)

Bli»U

1bT

Of

FINISHING

PROGRAM

.

m

POINT

HlAPk

Of

89

2.8.26.2

CONT’D)

Since

nearest

is

yond

its

turns

cutting

CUTTING

B<1

DISCONTINUED

POINT

\

(11)

For

point

concave

a

is

then

Stock

cutting

the

interrupted

the

bottom.

to

beyond

BEYOND

ZISCONTINl

POINT

a

simple

is

provided.

containing

convex

interrupted

the

at

DISCONTINUATION

Removal

starts

start

concave.

Then,

the

interrupted

it.

DISCONTINUATION

_

-

concave,

shown

as

first

smaller

in

Turning

with

the

hits

concave

The

the

cutting

//PATH1NG

-

y

ION

CAVE

if

point,

it

only

However,

smaller

a

below,

the

at

convex.

t

the

point

the

concave

cutting

convex

one

for

concave

cutting

larger

(G71)

path

be¬

cut

is

re¬

cycle

to

perform

DEPTH

CUT

D

interrupted

a

complex

convex

OF

and

path

(ill)

Any

contour

allow

cutting.

cation

value

should

(IV)

The

termination

to

program

BA

B

Nnf**»"

the

For

(Nnf

•

IS

•

having

of

be

a

monotonous

the

has

PARALLEL

1

G

command

)

;

,

specify

Hence,

the

block

following

TO

Z

overhang

an

the

finishing

variation.

for

AXIS

AA'

/

A

PARALLEL

the

of

G01

Z-axis

shape

the

finishing

limitations:

START

A

POINT

*

I

Nni**

NEED

termination

or

GOO

does

specifi¬

program

NOT

BE

TOXAXIS

,

in

princi¬

not

shape

block

pal.

(v)

The

cycle

retracting

may

\

N

amount

be

set

by

RETRACTING

(FOR

#6202

after

the

setting.

AMOUNT

C7I)

each

SETTING

approach

e

B

The

points

yond

"097"

number

Sample

CONVEX

CONCAVE

maximum

that

which

error.

number

allows

cutting

Within

concaves

of

DISCONTINUATION

Contour

CUTTING

PATH

DISCONTINU¬

2

ATION

.CUTTING

PAT]

CONCAVE*’

interrupted

of

cutting

is

DISCONTINU¬

ATION

Not

is

disabled,

limitation,

this

allowed.

is

1

CUTTING

DISCONTINUATION

2

CUTTING

DISCONTINUE

AT

CUTTING

i

4

Allowing

three,

ION

PATH

A

X

A

causing

PATH

3

NG

A'

Cutting

be¬

any

/

I

PATH

(vi)

Each

should

tonous

extends be

divided

block

be

decrease.

over

s

\

of

the

of

monotonous

two

into

two

CUTTING

finishing

A

circular

or

more

blocks

PATH

increase

shape

arc

quadrants

before

program

or

mono¬

which

roust

being

programmed.

(vn)

Generally,

K

and

is

caused

side.

tional

(vni)

crease

Approach

not

is

It

A

finishing

pending positioning

traverse

Z-axis

are

not

into

"Rl"

If

monotonous

stock

removal

is

performed

affected

shape

on

the

may

after

finishing

specified.

the

wall

not

is

increase

by

program.

finishing

be

performed

approach

the

4

Otherwise,

the

of

specified,

/monotonous

cycle

the

at

the

G

Hence,

shape

A

allowances

corresponding

the

is

provided.

feedrate.

code

of

program,

by

rapid

feedrate.

at

APPROACH

a

conven¬

the

de¬

W

bite

de¬

90

7/

yaskawa LX1 Operators Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

CONTENTS

INDEX

INTRODUCTION

Programming